Home

PM CEMS - User Manual

Contents

1. EI A e S o gr H E 8 9 Sd IS m o S Jori U H e s ad B a O E 23W ads IH Le e ka ol e WB Kei ERD ei EM E S E UN 1 aw 1d O ech i 0 e 9 Mo svs a svo 8 ad ipl a svo ER ERR um o 688 e n n n o HUET a e a e SS SS S DIW dds E e Figure 7 35 Probe Controller Electrical Sheet 2 7 65 Model 3880 Instruction Manual DIW WYS O3W 110 Thermo Fisher Scientific System Drawings Servicing
2. A G e Om e Rer Mt ue PIPER e e e NI SSv dA Z NOLNING L NOLNING 1 cp NOTM3L gos aly O33Z El n Kr M Figure 7 31 Probe Controller Plumbing Sheet 1 1 61 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing System Drawings 2 EE Se EE um 6000000 ER 00 CY since eine Lana ne os as CIO agni x dog zen bon ee qo Sft SO MONI OLQ3vOS WOU ONISWITIa SMOHS DREES ALENTO 404 NAAOHS LON Oger NOTIS ANY UIAOS d s Sd OL MOSI3 108 pi
3. Thermo Fisher Scientific ff STE TETO Bal rr Ken Sand a W I am KE a s 8 em E Sei ee f 34N1 LOLId 3ATVA A1ddng IO JILNVW OL ON NO ASS 2I IH OL ele d 2 ONILIA SSY AS WO3L WORMS E ES EENEG es 5 ON NO ASSY MINIS OL PO ma ONILIS NAN38S WOSL WORE o a O o O a E E TN 14 ON Mi el vv NOLLO3S Nowwoo zh UT e el ld Sd pd Sm wh cn qo TES d TIAWVS ole 2 mm Ee em d E mr E t a wee mi d 9 ei aa E EE T SSWdA e nnne e DT Nanuaa Figure 7 36 Probe Monitor Plumbing 7 66 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific SUUS Laer dz E EM EE DILUTION THERMOC OUPLE STACK THERMOCOUPLE DILUTION HEATER
4. YIM ONO Ya WIOJSNV aL SOINOYLO314 NOWWOO OL 32N313434 1 el e IN doy aa 33055344 e E e S wdSd eS D a E f Di Di Di d sersu To D E a aa art E o BER SE o 806 sa le 08 ag Ov e El e El ER e e 8 e 2 Je o d E 3I8V2 LHOHS HI WHOISNVAL S9INOULDITI NOWWOD OL 39N343434 bo OO SOSLLL ASSY 318V2 NI DV dav OSRSHLOW OINOIO313 NOWWOO WO 30N333434 T em TUE Figure 7 34 Probe Controller Electrical Sheet 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific 7 64 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Servicing System Drawings Qoo ASA UI PA a e 0000000
5. Command Description le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton list din Lists current selection for digital input list dout Lists current selection for digital output list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list list srec Lists current selection srec logging data list stream Lists current selection streaming data output list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables Ir Outputs long records in the format specified in the command Irec Outputs long records Irec format Reports sets output format for long records ASCII or binary Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data Irec mem size Reports maximum number of long records that can be stored Irec per Reports sets long record logging period malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for long records malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for short records me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton mm dur Reports current mass mode duration time setting mode Reports operating mode in local service or remote neph bkg a Reports current background of the zero value for the forward a of the nephelometer neph bkg b Reports current background of the zero value for the back b of the ne
6. 3 47 Allow Over Under Ranes movida eite Abe deg vvdb tais 3 47 Analog Output Configuration Select Action 3 48 Select EE 3 48 Minimum and Maximum Value EE 3 49 Choose Signal EE 3 51 Analog Input Conf sarao iia 3 52 BI osi eR 3 53 A sus s bio 3 53 IR EE 3 53 Number of Table Potts pesa cades ei Reo eO diis 3 54 LADIES eased a ec cete GN eel eG aes 3 54 Kee 3 55 User Valenti od RT Eos eet 3 55 Solenoid tte adiutus dae A ui e aaa Mr c 3 55 Screen Contistas cabe Amica Eus MIT So Maal tao cas eae 3 56 Service Mode de imd haa cua iiic aei tee 3 56 Dates mme tra m e rca b RD a N 3 57 A A i i 3 57 Diagnostics Menard di 3 58 IG 3 58 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual ix Contents x Model 3880 Instruction Manual CONCE AS co ceci ades aulas suada gas 3 59 Voltages omitido aaa 3 59 Motherboard Volt sesi io o dida 3 59 Interface Board Voltages caia 3 60 TO Board Voltas es so ecu te eed fette bit alat 3 60 Dual Nephelometer Board Voltages sss 3 60 EOD Gary circa e DA OD Ou DUE 3 61 Thermocouple Board Voltages see tri 3 61 TEMPE di ic eebe 3 61 PrESSUTES CES 3 62 Blowe natos usan ee eegen 3 62 MELO CIE ctii oet Moniales is 3 63 e 3 63 TEOM Parameter Sinnica ieaiaia 3 63 System Checks tts ductors se snakes s UNO Tea a oi e 3 64 Current System Checks arena tenne EEE 3 64 Analog Input
7. Output Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value PM Wet Zero 0 250 PM Dry Zero 0 250 PM Factor Zero 0 250 Fwd Zero 0 250 TEOM Conc Zero 0 250 Fwd Avg Zero 0 250 TEOM Inst Zero 0 250 Fwd Inst Zero 0 250 TEOM Avg Zero 0 250 CS Zero 0 250 Temp Stack Zero 0 250 Temp Dilutn User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Temp Stinger User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Temp Bypass User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Temp Neph User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Temp Neph Bk User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Temp Neph PC User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 50 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Output Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value Temp TE Air User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Temp TE Case User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Temp Prob CN User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph Source User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph Ref Det User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph Spn Src User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph Spn Ref User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph RH User set alarm min value User set alarm max value TEOM Freq User
8. Figure 2 6 Pitot Tube Assembly 4 2 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Install dilution assembly on to mantle cap Aligning both the 12 inch port and dilution air supply line Push with a slight twist to seat over the sealing 0 rings Once in place tighten 1 4 dilution air line Then tighten the three set screw to secure dilution assemble to mantle cap Figure 2 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Probe Monitor Preparation Mantle Cap Set Screws 3 Figure 2 7 Dilution Assembly 5 Install nozzle into dilution assembly Position nozzle tip pointing down seat and tighten Figure 2 8 Figure 2 8 Nozzle Assembly to damage stack temperature sensor sticking out of the mantle cap A A CAUTION While installing dilution nozzle and Pitot option take care not 6 Reinstall mantle shroud in reverse order Add silver goop to screw threads before installing Note Do not over tighten screws which could result in damaging shroud need tightness spec A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Probe Controller Probe Controller Use the following procedure to install the Model 38807 PM CEMS Probe Controller in an emissions monitoring application Refer to Figure 2 10 and Figure 2 11 for System Plumbing 1 Connect the 3 8 inch house zero air input line to the rear panel port labeled ZERO AIR The pressure input should be 80 100 psi 80 slpm 2 Connect t
9. FP 0 N 15V Ground 15V Ground 24V AIN SETRAP 4 20mA REG SPR AC SOL cO a N O 0 A CO N s o 24V Ground ACT SOL 5V BB SOL 5V TEOM BY SOL Ground DI BB SOL Ground SPARE SOL Ground DC VALVES Thermo Fisher Scientific J26 X cO OO N O o A CO N C02 1 SOL DIL AIR SOL 24V PC SOL PS SOL C022 SOL ED SOL 24V PD SOL Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 23 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 24 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pi o Signal Description N C SSR CNTRL J27 PRN cO aoa N on A CO N gt gt gt gt gt gt o O1 Es 99 N STINGER RELAY 15V BLOCK RELAY 15V VEN RELAY 15V DIL RELAY 5V C 15V SPARE 1 RELAY 15V PUMP RELAY 15V N C N C em vk SETRAV J28 24V AIN SETREV 4 20mA WDT DISABLE J29 WDT Ground JTAG J30 o ST A CO N TDO TDI TMS TCK RESET MUX Ground D Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Table 6 11 146 Connector Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator Gas A J1 24V 2 C02 1 SOL Gas B J2 24V 2 C022 SOL Gas C J3 24V 2 DIL AIR SOL Gas D J4 24V 2 ED SOL Gas E J5 24V 2 PC SOL Gas F J6 24V 2 PD SOL Z A J7
10. Voltage Pin Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 Analog Outp Ut Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter Calibration reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 10 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal menu press amp to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press 7 24 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and
11. Alarms Service Concentrations Temperature Calibration PM Wet Neph Bik PM Dry Dilution PM Factor Stinger Neph Fwd Bypass Neph Fwd Inst Stack Neph Fwd Avg MIB TEOM Pres Probe Calibration TEOM Inst Baro Press TEOM Avg Static Pres Cs Pitot Pres Temperature TEOM DP Pres Stack MFC Cal Pres Temp Dilution Sample MFC Calibration Stinger Dilution MFC Calibration Bypass Bypass MFC Calibration Neph Block Neph Purge Flow Neph Nephelometer Calibration Neph PCB Zero Cal Values TEOM Case Span Cal Values TEOM Air Tube Neph RH Probe Cntrl Neph Int Temp Pressure Neph Source Barometric Auto Span Pitot Analog Out Calibration Static Voltage Channel 1 6 TEOM DP Current Channel 1 6 Flows Analog Input Calibration Nozzle Input Channel 1 8 Dilution Display Pixel test Bypass Restore User Defaults Sample Purge Sample Chk Dil Ratio Nephelometer Nehp Src Neph Ref Det Neph Span Src Neph Span Ref Neph RH Neph Zero Drift Neph Span Drift Neph Fwd Gains TEOM TEOM Freq TEOM Std Dev TEOM KO Total Mass Instrument Velocity Manual Mode Service Mode Blow Back Period Motherboard Status Interface Status TCB Dual Neph TEOM VO Exp Ext Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware Model 3880 Instruction Manual Password Set Password Lock Instrument Change Password Remove Password Unlock Password 3 5 Operation Firmware Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is display
12. D15 Red Pump Relay D16 Red Spare Fuse D17 Red Neph Fuse D20 Red Pump Relay Fuse D22 Green PI BB Solenoid Control D23 Green Actuator Solenoid Control D24 Green BB Solenoid Control D25 Green Spare Solenoid Control D26 Green TEOM Bypass Control D28 Red Actuator Fuse D29 Red PI BB Fuse D30 Red BB Fuse D31 Red Spare Solenoid Fuse D32 Red TEOM Bypass Fuse Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 35 Troubleshooting PM CEMS Board Diagrams 6 36 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Table 6 20 SSR Board Fuses Designator Value Desciption XF1 4A 250V Stinger Relay AC1 XF2 4A 250V Stinger Relay AC2 XF3 4A 250V Bypass Relay AC1 XF4 4A 250V Bypass Relay AC2 XF5 4A 250V Ext Pump Relay AC1 XF6 AA 250V Ext Pump Relay AC2 XF7 4A 250V ISO 208V Line XF8 AA 250V ISO 208V Return XF9 4A 250V Spare ACT XF10 AA 250V Spare AC2 XF11 AA 250V Neph AC XF12 AA 250V Neph AC2 XF13 AA 250V ISO 120V Line XF4 4A 250V ISO 120V Return XF15 0 250A 250V PI BB AC1 XF16 0 250A 250V Actuator AC1 XF19 0 250A 250V BB AC1 XF20 0 250A 250V Spare AC1 XF23 0 250A 250V TEOM Bypass AC1 XF24 0 250A 250V Actuator AC2 XF25 0 250A 250V PI BB AC2 XF26 0 250A 250V BB AC2 XF27 0 250A 250V Spare AC2 XF28 0 250A 250V TEOM Bypass AC2 Table 6 21 Probe Temp Controller Board Status LEDs Designator Color Desciption D8 Green Processor Status 1Y D9 Green Processor Status 2Y D16 Green 24V P
13. Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Mems Sensor Replacement 2 Loosen the two captive screws on the pressure board protective cover and remove it 3 Remove the cable from the board 4 Follow the pressure sensor lines to their respective 1 8 inch union elbow fittings and remove the lines on the opposite side of the union Ensure to label lines removed for proper installation of replacement assembly 5 Remove the nuts from the five 1 8 inch union elbows and lift the unions off the threaded studs 6 Remove the two screws on the pressure board 7 Pop off the board from the two mounting studs and remove the assembly 8 To install the new pressure board follow previous steps in reverse 9 After installation of replacement assembly calibrate the instrument Refer to Pressure on page 4 1 Mems Sensor Use the following procedure to replace the mems sensor assembly Figure R epla cement 7 3 Refer to Figure 7 31 for plumbing connections and Figure 7 35 for electrical connections Equipment Required Mems sensor assembly Phillips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground e
14. Velocity range 4 20 m s 13 12 65 62 ft sec System temperature range 4 50 C non condensing for 19 in rack mounted probe controller Analog outputs 6 voltage outputs 0 100 mV 1 5 10 V user selectable 5 of full scale over under range user selectable 12 bit resolution measurement output user selectable per channel Model 3880 Instruction Manual 1 5 Introduction Specifications 1 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Item Description 6 current outputs firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C 10 digital relays Form A user selectable alarm output relay logic 100 mA 200 VDC Digital inputs 16 digital inputs user select programmable TTL level pulled high Serial ports 1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors baud rate 1200 115200 data bits parity and stop bits protocols C Link MODBUS and streaming data all user selectable Ethernet connection RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection static or dynamic TCP IP addressing Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Lifting A Chapter 2 Installation Installation of the Model 3880 PM CEMS includes lifting the instrument unpacking and inspection connecting sample zero span and exhaust lines and attaching the analog outputs to a recording device The instal
15. 5 33 Figure 5 33 Top View of TEOM Sample Inlet ii 5 34 Figure 5 34 O Ring Locations of the TEOM Mounting Assembly 5 35 Figure 5 35 Isolation of the Front Half of the Heated Bench Assembly 5 36 Figure 5 36 Isolated Dilution Assembly of the Mantle 5 37 Figure 5 37 Isolated Stinger Sample Assembly of the Mantle 5 38 Figure 5 38 Mantle Cap View 5 39 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram sesisesiiseeiieeeiieserenenenn 6 10 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement Interface 6 32 Figure 6 3 Board Level Connection Diagram Probe Temperature Voi No T 6 33 Figure 6 4 Board Level Connection Diagram TEOM Head Controller 6 33 Figure 6 5 Board Level Connection Diagram SSR Driver 6 34 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist tan 7 4 Figure 7 2 Probe Controller Component Layout Top View 1 8 Figure 7 3 Probe Controller Component Layout Panel Down 1 9 Figure 7 4 Probe Monitor Component Layout 7 10 Figure 7 5 Probe Monitor Top View 7 10 Figure 7 6 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the A 7 11 Figure 7 7 Replacing the Fan 7 14 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 7 8 Replacing the Internal Humpe 7 15 Figure 7 9
16. 1 and 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the top cover 2 Remove the plumbing from the inlet and outlet of the assembly 3 Disconnect the mass flow controller power cable 4 Loosen the two captive screws on the assembly mounting plate and remove the assembly 5 Install the new mass flow assembly by following the above directions in reverse 6 After installation of replacement assembly calibrate the instrument Refer to Bypass MFC on page 4 6 Use the following procedure to replace the bypass mass flow controller assembly Figure 7 3 Refer to Figure 7 31 for plumbing connections and Figure 7 35 for electrical connections Equipment Required Dilution control assembly Wrench 11 16 inch Phillips screwdriver 1 and 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing Pressure Board Replacement
17. RS485 TEOM J2 co CO N on A CO N gt Est Es O NVRAM 1 0 TE FREQ TE HEATER RTN ANALOG GROUND 10V DIGITAL GROUND TE THERM RTN TE HEATER PWR 10V NC NC RS485 AIR TUBE Thermo Fisher Scientific J3 54 Co N gt J4 oOo N C wo A CO N Ground RS485 RS485 5V REF TUBE HEATER RTN ANALOG GROUND 10V DIGITAL GROUND TUBE THERMO RTN TUBE HEATER PWR 10V Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 27 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 28 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator JTAG J5 1 TDO 2 TDI 3 TMS 4 TCK 5 RESET 6 GROUND 24V IN J6 1 24V 2 GROUND 24V OUT J7 1 24V 2 GROUND Table 6 15 SSR Driver Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label STINGER Reference Designator J1 Pin Signal Description AC1 AC2 BY PASS EXT PUMP MAIN POWER SSR DRIVER J2 J3 J5 cO a N on A CO N x o ACT AC2 ACT AC2 ACT AC2 Stinger Relay Stinger Relay By Pass Relay By Pass Relay Ext Pump Relay Ext Pump Relay Dil Relay Dil Relay Spare Spare Neph Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin gt gt gt gt gt Oo a EB w N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Neph Pump Relay Pump Relay NC NC Sol Valves
18. e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Addr CENT TEST E reisi ei Pd gig LOEO SO ai ati The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices T he netmask can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask Fis a a Py PTET pH Tied Luef bil ibl Li i eod APP A PUPRSQ2PUBPEP OO The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings T CP IP Settings Gateway Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Host Name The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Setti
19. Figure 5 37 Repeat test if leak persist then it is internal to the mantle assembly Refer to the next step Do Stinger Sample Tube d Mantle Cap 6 To remove the internal assemblies from the Mantle these are the steps to follow Note the Mantle does not have to be removed from the Probe Monitor housing to service the internals a Using a stiff Nylon bristle brush and pick to clean off the stack residue from the socket head mounting screws 5 32 Allen Head Wrench on the mantle shroud and mantle cap f CAUTION Take CAUTION not to bend the Stack Thermocouple A 5 38 Model 3880 Instruction Manual b Mantle must be cool and instrument must be turned off with the power removed Disconnect the Stack and Dilution Thermocouple from the connecting cables Disconnect the Dilution air supply from the elbow Disconnect the Stinger Tube Face Seal from the Heated bench Assembly Disconnect the 3 4 inch Dump tube from the Union Reducer take care not to lose the front amp back ferrule they tend not to bite into the PTFE tube Carefully dislodge the mantle cap from the mantle body and slowly pull the internal assemblies out guiding the cables and the dump Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Service Locations tube through the mantle body See Figure 5 38 for Mantle Cap view h Refer to steps 4 amp 5 to find the leaks in both the Dilution and Stinger Assemblies Note now you have
20. Hardware Power Thermocouple Actuator Assembly Sample Valve Control Assembly Assembly Valve Manifold Assembly TEOM Mounting Assemblv Mass Transducer Nephelometer Assembly Heated Bench Assembly Figure 8 1 Probe Monitor Hardware Components Probe Monitor The probe monitor is typically installed into an industrial source emission point through a 4 inch or 6 inch flange Most sample measurements are made within this probe monitor high level assembly and are controlled by the probe controller Dilution Nozzle The dilution nozzle is the point of the instrument that extracts and dilutes the particulate sample to be measured Mantle The mantle houses the dilution air heater and delivery tube in addition to a heated sample tube stinger thermocouple lines and pitot lines Heated Block The heated block transports the diluted sample from the mantle towards the nephelometer and TEOM The mantle also includes a pneumatically controlled ball valve a blow back port a secondary dilution air port and two thermocouples to measure the incoming sample temperature from the stinger and the outgoing sample temperature towards the bypass flow port 8 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Hardware Nephelometer The nephelometer is downstream of the heated block A slip stream of diluted sample is introduced to the nephelometer through a mini stinger probe from the h
21. Instruction Manual Concentrations Other Measurements Other Measurements 2 Analog Inputs TEOM Avg Temp TE Air Flw Bypass Analog Input 8 CS Temp TE Case Flw Sample Temp Prob CN Flw Samp Chk Neph Source Dil Ratio Neph Ref Det Stk Velocity Neph Spn Src Fwd Z Drift Neph Spn Ref Fwd Sp Drift Neph RH Total Mass TEOM Freq Flw Samp Dft TEOM Stdev TEOM Cycles TEOM KO Ref Clocks Neph Gains Neph Bkg G4 Air Tube Pwr Neph Bkg G5 Case Pwr Flw Purge Note Analog input 8 is reserved for a stack velocity signal input scaled to meters per second to use the site specific velocity in conjuction with an isokinetic application Analog Input Configuration The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input channels available for configuration Configuration includes entering the Descriptor Units Decimal Places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config Mettet Thermo Fisher Scientific Descriptor Units Decimal Places Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu ZOog DEN cl TEE The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor or name for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descr
22. J6 cO a N oon A CO N ACT SOL 5V BB SOL 5V TEOM BY SOL Ground P1 BB SOL Ground SPARE SOL Ground Dilution AC1 AC2 Spare AC1 AC2 Neph AC AC2 ISO 120 208 LINE INT PUMP CO N ISO 208 LINE ISO 120 LINE ISO Return ISO 120 LINE ISO 120 Return Ground AC Valves AC Valves ACT AC2 o oc A 0 Na NC ACT AC2 BB AC2 TEOM BY AC2 P1 BB AC2 SPARE AC2 NC Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 29 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 2 ACT AC1 3 BB AC 4 TEOM BY AC 5 P1 BB AC 6 SPARE AC1 Table 6 16 Dichot NEPH MIB Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator JTAG J1 4 us o O ON DOF C hM e C Pb wo FA E o 24V J2 1 24V 2 Ground Det A J3 1 Ground Det A 5V 5V FP Co N Ground RS485 RS485 RS485 J4 w N Det B J5 Ground 6 30 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pi FP 0 N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Det B 5V 5V Source J6 oao FP CO N IRED K IRED A Ground Ref PD NC RH TEMP J7 FP O N Ground 5V TEMP HIH RH HIH TEMP SEN J8 p 5V TEMP1 SEN S
23. MFC Dilution ratio alarm Improper dilution flow Improper bypass flow Improper sample flow Verify dilution flow setting and actual flow Verify zero air supply pressure If needed calibrate MFC If unit will not calibrate replace MFC Verify bypass flow setting and actual flow If needed calibrate MFC If unit will not calibrate replace MFC Verify sample flow setting and actual flow If needed calibrate MFC If unit will not calibrate replace MFC When flow audits are satisfactory perform a leack check on system Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Instrument Alarms Alarm Message Velocity alarm Clogged nozzle Possible Cause Customer setting Perform a system blow back If blow back does not clear clog nozzle will need removal and servicing Action This setting is customer based The default values are 0 00 to 30 0 ms Manual mode alarm Instrument left in Manual mode Change instrument mode Service mode alarm Instrument left in service mode Turn service mode OFF From Main Menu Instrument Controls Service Mode and toggle OFF to turn off exit Blow back period alarm Blow back period not set or scheduled Set blow back schedule and period From Main Menu Blow Back Schedule to set Motherboard status alarm Dislodged Arcturus board Damaged motherboard Remove Arcturus board Clean contacts and reseat Replace motherboard Mo
24. Note When unpacking the pump save the instruction manual that came with the pump for future reference A If there is obvious damage to the shipping container s when you receive the instrument notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument 1 Remove the instrument from the shipping container and set it on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear 2 Remove the cover to expose the internal components 3 Remove the packing material Figure 2 1 a Remove Packing 2 pieces Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 4 Check for possible damage during shipment 5 Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached 6 Remove shipping screws from sample pump Thermo Fisher Scientific System Requirements Instrument Installation Installation System Requirements 7 Re install the cover Voltage 200V 240V 50 60 Hz AC Clean Dry Air CDA Particulate free with a dew point of 40 C or less 80 100 psi with a flow capacity 280 slpm Zero Air Particulate free 80 100 psi with a flow capacity 280 slpm slpm standard liters per minute 25 C 1 atm Ensure that the instrument is connected to the air supply using the support umbilical noting all labels to ensure proper connection WA
25. Pressure Board Replacement 7 18 Model 38801 Instruction Manual not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the top cover 2 Remove the plumbing from the inlet and outlet of the assembly 3 Disconnect the mass flow controller power cable 4 Loosen the two captive screws on the assembly mounting plate and remove the assembly 5 Install the new mass flow assembly by following the above directions in reverse 6 After installation of replacement assembly calibrate the instrument Refer to Dilution MFC on page 4 5 Use the following procedure to replace the pressure board assembly Figure 7 3 Refer to Figure 7 32 and Figure 7 33 for plumbing connections and Figure 7 34 for electrical connections Equipment Required Pressure board assembly Phillips screwdriver 2 Nut driver 1 4 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover
26. Replacing the DC Power Supp 7 22 Figure 7 10 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pms 7 23 Figure 7 11 Replacing the I O Expansion Board 7 28 Figure 7 12 Rear Panel Board Lonnectors sss 7 29 Figure 7 13 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 1 33 Figure 7 14 Replacing the Nephelometer ii 1 35 Figure 7 15 Nephelometer Connertons 1 36 Figure 7 16 Heated Bench Upside Down View 7 37 Figure 7 17 Heated Bench Removed eee 7 37 Figure 7 18 Replacing the Valve Manifold cc ii 7 39 Figure 7 19 Replacing the TEOM Boa 7 40 Figure 7 20 Removing the Actuator Assembly 7 42 Figure 7 21 Replacing the Sample Control Valve 7 43 Figure 7 22 Removing DC Power Supply Cover 7 45 Figure 7 23 Thermocouple Power Supply Assembly Top View 7 45 Figure 7 24 Thermocouple Power Supply Bottom View 7 46 Figure 7 25 Removing the Thermocouple Board Cover 7 47 Figure 7 26 Thermocouple Board Assembhy 7 47 Figure 7 27 Thermocouple Hlacemenmt sss 7 50 Figure 7 28 Removing the Mantle Assembly s 7 51 Figure 7 29 Mantle Cap Assembly with Lonnectong 7 54 Figure 7 30 Stack Thermocouple Length 7 59 Figure 7 31 Probe Controller Plumbing Sheet 7 61 Figure 7 32 Probe Controller Plumbing Sheet 2 7 62 Figure 7 33 Probe Controller Plumbing Sheet 2 1 63 Figure 7 34 Probe Controller Electrical Sheet 7 64 Figure 7 35 Probe Controller Electrical Sheet 2 7
27. Servicing LCD Module Replacement LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 o Retaining Screw Front Panel Board Ce Bottom Support Figure 7 13 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 13 Equipment Required LCD module Phillips screwdriver CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Nephelometer Replacement Nephelometer Replacement 7 34 Model 38801 Instruction Manual The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully a Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do no
28. current concentration calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Reset User Cal The Reset user Cal Defaults screen is used to reset user calibration defaults Defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Reset User Cal Defaults Instrument Controls The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items dealing with M enu instrument hardware control and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls 3 12 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Functional Modes The Functional Modes screen allows the user to select the current operating functional mode This selection will be overridden by any set scheduled mode unless in Service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Functional Mode thi KR Valve Power The Valve Power screen read only displays the valve status either ON or OFF To toggle valves on off the system must be in Manual mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Valve Power Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation Instrument Controls Menu CO ouod Piet Set Temperatures The Set Temperatures menu allows the user to view and set all thermistor user desired values e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Temperatures Set Temperatures The Set Temperat
29. dd OLS MOST dOL NOIIZINNOD ON HIO4 Z MOM 108 L Moga dol e la 2 e NG e vid OLP Die e 03 3 nl NOT3L Co gl E T Moda S L REH SENSORS Figure 7 32 Probe Controller Plumbing Sheet 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific 7 62 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing System Drawings P2 RIGHT LOWER PORT NO CONNECTION P4 RIGHT LOWER PORT NO CONNECTION P5 LEFT UPPER PORT NO CONNECTION P BOTH PORTS NO CONNECTION Figure 7 33 Probe Controller Plumbing Sheet 3 Mode
30. e SPARE ses NEPH we e E STINGER secas STACK ames BYPASS tas DILUTION 2x10 RS485 our x Ei a z 5 o S o Figure 7 37 Probe Monitor Electrical STINGER HEATER Servicing System Drawings Model 3880 Instruction Manual 1 61 Servicing Service Locations Service Locations For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International 7 68 Model 3880i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Hardware Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions e Hardware on page 8 1 e Firmware on page 8 5 e Electronics on page 8 7 e I O Components on page 8 9 Model 3880 PM CEMS hardware components include e Probe Monitor Dilution Nozzle Mantle Heated Block Nephelometer TEOM Pneumatic Controls Temperature Control Power Supply e Probe Controller Diluton MFC Bypass MFC Sample MFC Bypass Pump Sample Pump e Pneumatic Umbilical e Electrical Umbilical Model 3880 Instruction Manual 8 1 System Description
31. internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Atthe probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Atthe Probe Monitor remove the monitor from the stack by removing the stack flange bolts then gently slide the Probe Monitor out of the stack taking caution not to damage the nozzle or stack thermocouple mounted on the end of the mande Place Monitor on a flat work surface and support the Mantle assemble to prevent damage to the Monitor chassis Allow time for the mantle to cool before starting disassembly 3 Disconnect the two Monitor side covers 4 Disconnect the Dilution and Stack thermocouple connections Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Stack Thermocouple Removal 5 Disconnect the Dilution and Stinger heater connections 6 Disconnect the 1 4 inch Dilution 1 line at the elbow connection at the Mantle 7 Loosen the 3 4 inch Dump line at the reducer connection Do not completely remove this nut as the ferrules are PTFE and can fall off during the removal process 8 Disconnect the Stinger Tube Face Seal fitting from the Heated Bench Assembly 9 Disconnect the three Pitot lines from the Pitot Tube Manifold assembly 10 If needed use a stiff nylon brush and a pick to clean off stack residue from the Mantle Cap socket head mounting screws Using a 5 16 inch Allen wrench remove the Mantle Cap mounting screws 11 Carefully dislodge the Mant
32. not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Analog Output Testing Analog Output Testing 7 22 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 3 Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate and lift out the power supply Power Supply ge Retaining Screws 4 BOTTOM VIEW Captive Screw Figure 7 9 Replacing the DC Power Supply 4 Turn the power supply upside down and remove the four retaining screws securing the power supply to the power supply plate and remove the power supply 5 To install the DC power supply follow the previous steps in reverse The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing 1 Connect a met
33. then calibrate full scale A 5 Use t until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA then press to save the value 6 Press WW to return to the previous screen 7 Press Y to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use t until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Analog Input Cal screen press amp to scroll to a channel and press 3 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing Analog Input Calibration 1 26 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale Model 3880 Instruction Manual 4 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected chann
34. 16 ID Tygon tubing 2 in 1 8 OD X 1 16 ID Tygon tubing 2 ft 1 4 OD X 1 18 ID Sample MFC 4 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Figure 4 2 TEOM Calibration Diagram Use the following procedure to calibrate the sample mass flow controller Equipment Required Flow meter with a min max range of 0 5 50 slpm and accuracy of 2 of reading max Wrench 9 16 inch Note System must be operational for a minimum of 30 minutes before starting this procedure All flows entered must reference standard conditions i e 25 C 760 mmHg A 1 Atthe Probe Monitor remove the Sample umbilical line and connect the flow meter to the umbilical line 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt MFC Cal Pres Temp Set the pressure to 760 0 mmHg and the temperature to 25 0 C using the keypad and press to save Press Cm to return to the Service menu Note If Service is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 From the Service menu choose Sample MFC Calibration gt 60 FS Observe flow meter and allow time for flow reading to stabilize When flow is stable enter the standard flow from the reference meter and press to save Press to return to the Sample MEC Cal menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Dilution MFC Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Dilution MFC 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the flow values in order from largest value to smallest 5 Remove t
35. 24V 1 4A Model 3880 Instruction Manual Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 17 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 2 GND 3 24V 1 4A 4 GND POWER SUPPLY J25 1 5V TEST 2 3 3V 3 15V 4 3 3V Table 6 8 0 Expansion Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Designator EXPANSION 1 0 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 6 18 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Signal Description Analog Voltage Input 1 Analog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground Analog Voltage Input 7 Analog Voltage Input 8 Flow Ground NC Current Output Return Ground Current Output 1 Current Output Return Current Output 2 Current Output Return Current Output 3 Current Output Return Current Output 4 Current Output Return Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 23 Current Output 5 24 Current Output Return 25 Current Output 6 MOTHER BD J2 1 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Motherboard 8 RS485 to Motherboard Table 6 9 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Designator MOTHER BD J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 x Signal Descriptio
36. 65 Figure 7 36 Probe Monitor Piumbung is 7 66 Figure 7 37 Probe Monitor Dectmca es 1 67 Figure 8 1 Probe Monitor Hardware Components sss 8 2 Figure 8 2 Probe Controller Components es 8 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual xix Figures xx Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 3880 PM CEMS Specifications ssss 1 5 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons sss 3 3 Table 3 2 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale ccc cees cece teesteseeeees 3 49 Table 3 3 Signal Type Group Uhoces eee 3 51 Table 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Schedule sss 5 2 Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide es 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Probe Controller ii 6 3 Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Instrument Alams ii 6 5 Table 6 4 Troubleshooting Power Thermocouple Assembly 6 6 Table 6 5 Troubleshooting Nepbelomerer ii 6 8 Table 6 6 Troubleshooting IEN 6 8 Table 6 7 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions s51111551111151111111111 6 11 Table 6 8 O Expansion Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 18 Table 6 9 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 19 Table 6 10 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 21 Table 6 11 146 Connector Board Connector Pin Description
37. Descriptions Signal Description 2A 3A 4A 5A BA 7A BA 9A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B R 485 IN P RX R 485 OUT N TX N C GND N C RS485_OUT_P RTS R 485 IN N CTS N C N C R 485 IN P RX R 485 OUT N TX N C GND N C R 485 OUT P RTS R 485 IN N CTS N C USB A amp B J8 cO a Nn on P CO FA VBUS A VBUS B USB PORTA N USB PORTB N USB PORTA P USB PORTB P GND GND GND GND USB C amp D J9 Oc OC FP CO N VBUS C VBUS D USB PORTC N USB PORTD N USB PORTC P USB PORTD P GND Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 14 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Signal Description GND GND GND 24V IN 24 GND WATCH DOG DISABLE DISABLE GND MCU RESET DISABLE GND DIGITAL OUTPUT cO a N on A CO N 15V 24V 24V GND GND GND RESET SPI_MISO SPI_MOSI SPI_CS2 SPI_CLK EXTERNAL ACCESSORY cO a N on A CO N EXT_RS485_N EXT_RS485_P 5V 1 2A 5V 1 2A 5V 1 2A GND GND GND N C N C 24V1 2A 24V1 2A Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 13 24V1 2A 14 24V1 2A 15 24V1 2A TDO JTAG J16 on em O E C wN ce gt gt gt gt 99 N 24V MONITOR
38. Df a eo te to S usa 3 89 Nepht Fwd Gains x jrcsced ates cedit deterius iubes edac ta 3 89 TG MV ain ee 3 90 TEOM Frequency Geigendeel ee ege 3 90 TEOM Std Me ecg at date ida 3 91 TEOM EE 3 92 KREE 3 92 Ratio gh ia le ons Cl epe da dd 3 93 KE 3 94 KEE 3 94 Temperature dan SG decedit 3 95 Pressure Probe abran ales 3 96 Barometer Pressure Calibrador ceda 3 96 Calibrate Barometer Pressure Span ce e iede 3 97 Restore Default C allbratio deedosdeteceuieeg eque dette ege AE 3 97 Static Pressure Calibration tesi neptis 3 97 Calibrate Static Pressure Letonia id is cata hae 3 98 Calibrate Static Pressure Span paso obstet 3 98 eegene 3 99 MEC Calibration Pressure Temperature nacio 3 99 Sample MFC Calibration iniciada 3 99 Set Sample MPC Calibration t doeet atento ts 3 100 Dilution MEC Calibration n utei daca chee asas Eats 3 100 Set Dilution MFC Calibration osa dote eedem recte 3 101 Bypass MECC AIDA a tate ads 3 101 Set Bypass MEC Calibration idet dos 3 102 Wephelomieter Puros Blow eom enti te petit 3 102 Nephelometer Calibration iiia sis 3 102 Zero Calibration EE 3 103 Span Calibration Values ce estas i e Dra tuedutis 3 104 Nephelometer Hato tones Gon aa en oed id oae 3 105 Nephelometer INT Temperature conto be 3 105 Nephelometer Source etd seii dde e detis 3 105 DUELO SDAD ecran ide ni sati tam a eL ebbe Lu M Se 3 106 Model 3880 Instruction Manual xi Contents xii Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Model 3880 Instruction M
39. E 3 64 Pi alow Input Volare arta ii dei qae i 3 65 Digital Inputs santa sas ale po ceder A o tom dou 3 65 Relay States mm 3 65 Test Analog Outputs ssnipe SEENEN 3 66 Set Analog OWUtputs ee EE 3 66 Instrument nee EE 3 67 Contact Informations nenesie a 3 67 Alarms Menterne dana Canada 3 67 Concentrations eege Ee 3 68 PM Wet Conc PM Dry Concierto aros eegen deeg cs 3 68 PM WEE 3 69 Neph Forward Neph Fwd Inst Neph Forward Avg 3 70 TEOM TEOM Inst TEOM Avg Cs Conc eee 3 70 Tom peratUre d 3 71 Stack TEMA a 3 72 Dilution Temperature viii ia 3 72 Stinger KE 3 73 Bypass Temperatile eege eebe ee eb Eesen 3 74 Neph Block Temperdtutes usa dee 3 74 Neph Temperature Neph PCB Temperature sses 3 75 TEOM Case Temperature isis idilio 3 76 TEOM Air Tube Temperature lo id 3 76 Probe Control Temperature ninia 3 77 A A A AARE 3 78 Daromettic Presi aa aba 3 78 Static PRESSURE palio 3 79 liri irr c m 3 79 TEOM DE PE daa dune va ict ded ses dun 3 80 gm m EET 3 81 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Ee 3 81 Dilution Flow Bypass Flow eerte 3 82 Sample Flow Sample Check Flow sss 3 82 Sample Drift iae da 3 83 pilunos Rato Plow doi O a d d 3 84 E 3 84 IN ep base tice sd sabe ce cheese ta Oe tea Oe 3 85 Neph RE 3 85 Neph Span EE 3 86 Nephi Span E 3 87 INE E RE ANM A naa 3 87 Neph Zero Dates aires e 3 88 Nephi spans
40. EE EE TEOMKO The TEOM KO screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 125 to 145 Ifthe TEOM KO reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt TEOM Ko PEOCTE THT mT Laf miie GLE i4 SO PUREE EE e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt TEOM KO gt Min or Max GEE WEE Lef Ph 0 Aiii L dio Phe fni i Total Mass The Total Mass screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 1 to 5 mg If the total mass reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated 3 92 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt Total Mass e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt Total Mass gt Min or Max Instrument The Instrument submenu allows the user to choose which pressure alarm values to modify inspect The Velocity sceen allows the user to view and set the selected velocity alarm parameter All other items are read only e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Instrument hi ii Model 3880 Instructi
41. GMT 3 DLT GMT 4 ECH GMT 5 FOX GMT 6 GLF GMT 7 CCT GMT 8 JST GMT 9 GST GMT 10 LMA GMT 11 DLE GMT 12 EDT GMT 5 4 CDT GMT 6 5 MDT GMT 7 6 and PDT GMT 8 7 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Diagnostics Menu Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for the first time or if the timezone was cleared with a C Link command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Timezone Dia gn ostics Menu The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Program Versions The Program Versions screen read only shows the version numbers of the programs installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and the program version numbers e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Program Versions 3 58 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Concentrations The Concentrations screen displays the current concentration readings e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Concentrations Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter e Inthe Main Menu choose
42. HEPA filter 7 Remove filter by pressing the orange ring on the PTC fitting back towards the fitting and the filter should easily pull out of the fitting When reinstalling filter the flow indicator arrow on filter should point opposite of the actual flow To reinstall filter simply press the filter tip into the PTC fitting unit it bottoms out 8 Replace probe controller top cover 9 Power up the system The 3880 unit is shipped with a Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance TEOM filter installed on the tapered element TE but the filter must be changed periodically Use the following procedure to replace the TEOM filter within the Probe Monitor Equipment Required TEOM Filter TEOM filter tool Equipment Damage It s important to read all the following steps before replacing the filter a Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Remove the right side cover of the probe monitor Locate the TE handle Figure 5 2 Slide handle to the right until it stops and carefully pull the mass transducer assembly straight down ensuring the filter clears the TEOM mounting assembly
43. If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 At the Probe Controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the top cover of the probe monitor to access internal components CAUTION When removing the top cover remove the three screws at the front of the cover before loosening or removing screws at the bulkhead A 3 Remove the RS 485 and power connections 4 Remove the thermocouple connections from thermocouple board 5 Remove electrical connections from the power supply 6 Remove four mounting screws from thermocouple power supply assembly 7 44 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing DC Power Supply Monitor Replacement Screws 4 Figure 7 22 Removing DC Power Supply Cover Thermocouple Board Sample Valve Screws 4 Figure 7 23 Thermocouple Power Supply Assembly Top View 7 Remove four nuts Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 45 Servicing Thermocouple Board Replacement 1 46 Thermocouple Board Replacement A Model 3880 Instruction Manual Power Supply Screws 4 Figure 7 24 Thermocouple Power Supply Bottom View 8 Remove two power supply mounting screws from underside of assembly 9 Install the new DC power supply b
44. Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Neph Block gt Min or Max Neph Temperature Neph The Nephelometer Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the PCB Temperature selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 70 C If the nephelometer temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu The Neph PCB Temperature screen functions the same way e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Neph E DHOBM e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Temperatures Neph Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Alarms Menu TEOM Case Temperature The TEOM Case Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 64 to 66 C If the TEOM case temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt TEOM Case e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt TEOM Case gt Min or Max TEOM Air Tube The TEOM Air Tube Temperature screen allows the user to view and set Temperature the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 61 to 63 C
45. J17 1 24V 2 GND LCD J18 1 GND GND LCDOUT CLK GND GND LCDOUT LP LCDOUT HM LCDOUT4 LCDOUTO 10 LCDOUTS LCDOUT1 LCDOUT6 LCDOUT2 LCDOUT7 LCDOUT3 o N N oo A CO N gt gt gt gt gt al m 99 N Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 16 LCDBIAS 17 5V 18 GND 19 GND 20 LCDOUT_ONOFF 21 KEYPAD_ROW2 22 KEYPAD_ROW1 23 KEYPAD_ROW4 24 KEYPAD_ROW3 25 KEYPAD_COL2 26 KEYPAD_COL1 27 KEYPAD_COL4 28 KEYPAD_COL3 29 GND 30 GND 31 GND 32 GND 33 24V 34 24V AC IN J19 1 NEUTRAL 2 LIVE 3 EARTH AC 24V POWER J20 1 NEUTRAL SUPPLY 2 LIVE 3 EARTH AC INTF BOARD J21 1 NEUTRAL 2 LIVE 3 EARTH DISPLAY J22 1 GND 2 LCDOUT_CLK 3 LCDOUT_LP 4 LCDOUT_FLM 5 GND Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin cO co N OD gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o O1 Es 99 N wo FA DN NY NO NMN YH N MH FA NWN O cO CO N C CO FP 0 N O Signal Description c OC A CO N LCDOUT1 LCDOUT2 LCDOUT3 LCDOUT4 LCDOUTS GND LCDOUT_ONOFF 3 3V 3 3V CONTRAST KEYPAD J23 CO N C wo A CO N KEYPAD ROW1 KEYPAD_ROW2 KEYPAD_ROW3 KEYPAD_ROW4 KEYPAD_COL1 KEYPAD_COL2 KEYPAD_COL3 KEYPAD_COL4 DISPLAY BACKLIGHT J24
46. Measurement Interface Connectors located on the measurement interface board include Board Connectors Data communication with the motherboard 24V and 120VAC power supply inputs Fan and solenoid outputs Flow and pressure sensors Ambient temperature sensor Input board SSR Board The solid state relay SSR board is used to control all AC powered components such as pumps heaters and valves 8 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Sensor Assembly Digital Output Board Front Panel Connector Board 1 0 Expansion Board 1 0 Components Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing a series of pressure transducers with a gas input fitting The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other Eight solenoid driver outputs open collector are provided along with a corresponding 24VDC supply pin on the connector The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the front panel mounted function key panel and graphics display I
47. Menu choose Alarms Concentrations The Concentration submenu allows the user to view and set the selected concentration alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations PM Wet Conc PM Dry Conc The PM Wet Conc screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 1 to 200 mg m If the reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated 3 68 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu The PM Dry Conc screen functions the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations gt PM Wet e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations gt Concentration gt Min or Max PM Factor The PM Factor screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 1 to 25 If the reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Concentrations PM Factor Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations gt PM Factor gt Min or Max PRIS TREE Py Tame ob fade Prid Liimi Li ib i Neph For
48. Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Neph Source Auto Span The Auto Span submenu allows the user to first select a maximum concentration compatible with the operating permit and initiate an auto span curve e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Auto Span The Auto Span Max screen allows the user to select a site specific maximum span value e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Auto Span gt Max The Auto Span Start Auto Span screen allows the user to initiate a span curve Allow 15 minutes 3 106 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Auto Span gt Start Auto Span Analog Output Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to the 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels for calibration The analog output calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration mi Zei ell ES DHOBM o Fit PISA Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected
49. Monitor Note With the ACTUATOR in the off position and or no power applied to the Probe Monitor With the unit in the stack it becomes limited to leak test the front end Without access to the Dilution Module and the Nozzle you are restricted to just the front end of the Heated Bench Assembly If unit is located out of the Stack proceed to step 3 to start leak check A 1 To leak check the front half of the Heated Bench Assembly a Remove the Stinger Tube from the Heated Bench Assembly and cap with the medium VCO cap Remove the Blowback tube and attach the 3 8 adapter tube to the fitting Connect the red silicone tubing to port adapter and draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks If the leak is within the Heated Bench Assembly this must be service by a qualified Thermo Technician See Figure 5 35 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 35 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check 5 36 Model 388017 Instruction Manual Blowback Fitting r 4 Figure 5 35 Isolation of the Front Half of the Heated Bench Assembly 2 A potential leak point can also be a failure of the Blowback Valve a To verify if the valve is closed properly Connect the red silicone tubing to the Blowback feed tube and draw the vacuum back to 25 in Hg and wait for
50. VT ADM NC Ground BOX TMP J3 Controller Therm Ground 24 IN RS485 24V OUT FAN J4 J5 24V Ground Ground RS485 RS485 24V Ground 24V Ground SAM MFC o oO A CO N AIN MFC SAM AOUT MFC SAM Ground 15V 15V Ground By Pass MFC FP Co N AIN MFC By Pass AOUT MFC By Pass Ground 15V Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 21 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 22 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Signal Description 15V Ground DIL MFC o oO A CO N AIN MFC DiL AOUT MFC DiL Ground 15V 15V Ground SERVO POT o oO A CO N L2 SPR 24V 24V SPR SOL 1 RED ED AOUT EDUCTOR PRES Ground SPR 24V SETRA VAC FP O N 24V SPR SOL 2 24V A1 AIN VAC PRES 24V A1 RET AIN VAC PRES SERVOMEX CO N NC AIN SERVOMEX Ground SERVOMEX CO N NC TEMP STATUS Ground FLOW CHK w N 5V AIN FLOW CHK Ground SPR 24 24V Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pi Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description SPR 24V CNTRL REG VTX J20 AOUT VORTEX PRES Ground SENTRA VEN J21 m e Co N 24V A2 AIN VENT PRES 24V A2 RET AIN VENT PRES SRVMX PWR J22
51. access to the Dilution Thermocouple and the fittings on the rear of the mantle cap i Reinstall in the reverse order and apply Silver Goop to the socket head mounting screws thread before re installing Stinger Sample Assembly Dilution Module Stack Temp Thermocouple Bee Dilution Thermocouple Dilution Assembly Figure 5 38 Mantle Cap View Se VICO For additional assistance Thermo Fisher Scientific has service available Locations from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com agi Toll Free U S only 1 866 282 0430 U S Latin America and Canada 1 508 520 0430 Europe 31 76 579 5555 China 86 10 8419 3588 Asia Pacific 91 22 27781102 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 39 Safety Precautions Troubleshooting Thermo Fisher Scientific Guides Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information for the PM CEMS e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 1 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 10 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 11 e PM CEMS Board Diagrams on page 6 32 e Service Locations on page 6 38 The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems See Service Loc
52. analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the Hg concentrations The display is updated every 60 seconds in the switching mode In the continuous mode the display is updated every 1 10 seconds depending on the averaging time Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Electronics Motherboard System Description Electronics The analog output ranges are user selectable via firmware The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range The defaults are calculated by dividing the data values by the full scale range for each of the three parameters and then multiplying each result by the user selected output range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and span values may be set by the user to any desired value All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the entire operating range The external pump and heaters all operate on 110VAC An optional transformer is required if operating on the 210 250VAC or 90 110VAC ranges An on off switch controls all power to the instrument and is accessible on the front panel The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies a sub P P processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the
53. as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Analog Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 28 Other Measurements 2 Commit Content Model 3880 Instruction Manual The Other Measurements 2 screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected record field The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed Note that at this point pressing e indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Other Measurements 2 The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been made to any of the record fields for the selected record type Saving changes will erase record log file data for that record type If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu information about selecting the content of logged data
54. at this point Either you can swap out the TEOM Mass Transducer with a known good one or verify the O Rings on the TEOM Mounting Assembly Figure 5 34 shows a detailed view of the location of the O Rings in the TEOM Mounting Assembly and Heated Air Tube Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check 1 8 Sealing Plug Le TEOM Sample Port Figure 5 32 TEOM Sample Port Isolated from Sample Valve and Filter 15 Replace or service the Heated Air Tube and TEOM Mounting Assembly O Rings a It is recommended to remove the TEOM Mounting Assembly from the Probe Monitor using a 3 8 inch wrench There are several small parts and the possibility of causing damage to the assembly Disconnect the two seven pin cable connection and the two filter assemblies Note the orientation for re installation b Remove the TEOM Mass Transducer from the Mounting Assembly Note the orientation of the release handle and the position of the TEOM Mounting Cap This will assist you later in re assembly c Usea Tweezers to remove the O Rings from the Heated Air Tube Assembly When re installing the two O Rings on the Heated Air Tube Assembly take care not to damage the new O Rings while installing Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the O Rings before installation See Figure 5 34 d To replace the TEOM Sample Inlet O Ring remove the retaining E Clip by prying it back using a flat headed screwdriver and then remove
55. can contain up to 32 different fields or data items and records can be created at user defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes Record generation is tied to the instruments real time clock For example if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes a new srec will be generated on every hour and every half hour 10 00 10 30 11 00 Lrecs and srecs function independent of each other So for example an srec containing just the current PM level could be generated every 5 minutes while an lrec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be generated once every hour The analyzer s computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory which is enough to store a full Irec containing 32 data items and a full srec containing 32 items once each minute for a week gt 20 000 total records If logging is limited to the minimum content of date time PM concentration and error flags the analyzer can store data once each minute for 4 months gt 190 000 total records Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Datalogging Settings menu allows the user flexibility in how data is stored and recorded e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Srec Lrec The Select Srec Lrec screen is used to select the log record type for other operations in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Srec Lrec EN
56. connect fitting and Y tubing to the Outlet See Figure 5 28 5 28 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check E Fitting Adapter Nut amp A Push Connect Fitting s k La a CU Figure 5 28 Nephelometer Outlet with Adapter Fitting c Connect the hand vacuum pump using the red silicone set the hand pump to VACUUM and draw 6 in Hg on the vacuum gauge CAUTION Never pressurize the TEOM mass transducer A Note Because of the Purge Air orifice on the Nephelometer you will have to wait a minute for the vacuum value to stabilize Draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize A d Draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes e Ifvacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks 8 Verify that both O rings are in place on the Inlet and the Outlet of the Nephelometer Disconnect Purge Air from the Nephelometer Push fitting collar in to remove tubing a Insert 1 4 inch sealing plug into the purge air port on the Nephelometer and draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes b Ifvacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks I
57. e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 7 ors Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 3880i Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual iSeries Instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS save address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to Ox7F hex This address is only used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device
58. e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt User Value o EH mata it P das E D Solenoid States The Relay State screen displays the state of the 8 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off off The solenoids are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Screen Contrast Service Mode 3 56 Model 3880 Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Solenoid States The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between O and 100 in increments of 5 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures Note The optimal contrast will change with changes in temperature A Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD to another If the LCD is replaced the contrast may need to be reset A Note If the display contrast is not optimal but the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set the screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls
59. fields see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Commit Content Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging record field items to default values for the selected record type For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Reset to Default Content MER Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently selected record type e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Instrument Controls Menu pirg r Tee mT wer peer Li KA Mettet Logging Period Min The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the selected record format srec or Irec List of choices include off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Logging Period Min S PILRQOPUPMPO Memory Allocation The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of Percent total memory that may be used by the selected record type recs or srecs Percenta
60. front panel mounted function key panel and or over I O connections on the rear panel and sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the front panel mounted graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include e External connectors e Internal connectors Model 3880 Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description Electronics External Connectors External connectors include External Accessory RS 232 485 Communications two connectors Ethernet Communications I O connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal Connectors Internal connectors include Function key panel and Display Measurement Interface Board Data I O Expansion Board Data Digital Output Board AC distribution Measurement The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all Interface Board measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard
61. gt Screen Contrast The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off Turning service mode ON locks out any remote actions and allows access to parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the PM CEMS The service wrench icon on the status bar is Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Date Time Timezone Operation Instrument Controls Menu shown when service mode is on For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Note T he service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode OIBHZT Gips pH Cp A Tt er Af PME hae TEEN EE The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the Network Time Protocol NTP server This should be set to the timezone that the instrument is located in If the exact timezone is not shown in the list it may be entered via the C LINK tz command see Appendix B The selections are UTC GMT EST GMT 5 CST GMT 6 MST GMT 7 PST GMT 8 YST GMT 9 HST GMT 10 NST GMT 11 DLW GMT 12 CET GMT 1 EET GMT 2 BST
62. holes Figure 2 16 to stack sample port thru holes so probe is in desired position Refer to Figure 2 17 and install hardware in four places Figure 2 17 Mantle Mount Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 2 17 Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display screens front panel pushbuttons and menu driven firmware For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Firmware Overview on page 3 4 e Averaging lime on page 3 10 e Calibration Factors on page 3 11 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 12 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 57 e Alarms Menu on page 3 67 e Service Menu on page 3 94 e Password Menu on page 3 111 Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus usel t Jand Y Jto move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880i Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons o 3 D Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto nS The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the
63. iai View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view the logged data by the number of records or by date and time Note that both types of records cannot be viewed at the same time only the selected record type e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt View Logged Data are EH DHOBM PPS o PuLPUuPP Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the number of records to view ending with the most recent It also shows the total number of records that have been logged for the selected record type DH Guided Fi PAI The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Pe PULQPUPMPO Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 Jan 2009 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 Jan 2009 10 01 EEE MEA IT LUE DH pikor Ref Fiat Ai Pe PULPUPMPO The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records 3 24 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EH iai Erase Log The Erase Log screen
64. iate Piet 3 88 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Zero Drift gt Min or Max EH mia Neph Span Drift The Neph Span Drift screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from to 4 in percent If the neph span drift reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Nephelometer Neph Span Drift CHL mee e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Span Drift gt Min or Max are EH DH A fini i Neph Fwd Gains The Neph Fwd Gains screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable minimum alarm limits range from 2 to 5 If Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 89 Operation Alarms Menu the neph fwd gains reading goes beyond the minimum an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Fwd Gains EEE MEE Pi Talal DH DEM MP os AP La ake POE Scala AS d e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Fwd Gains gt Min corey TROT mT Wei per LIA i4 S PILIPUHPM
65. inch PTFE line at the coupling and disconnect the TEOM tube from the NEPH assembly 5 At the TEOM mounting assembly remove the top Viton line from the reducing tee fitting located just behind the bottom TEOM tube coupling At the top of the assembly remove the two mounting nuts and remove the TEOM mounting assembly from the monitor 6 At the NEPH assembly remove the 1 8 inch purge line the thermocouple cable and the heater cable Loosen the large VCO fitting between the heated block and Neph assemblies Loosen the screws on the NEPH mounting plate and remove the NEPH assembly from the Monitor Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 17 Preventive Maintenance Sample Line Brush Down CDA Line Screws 4 TEOM Mounting Nuts Viton Line TE Transducer TEOM Tube Purge Line Bypass Tee Heater Large VCO Fitting Cable Figure 5 18 Sample Line Brush Down either loosening or tightening the large VCO fitting to ensure the bypass tee does not spin This could cause leaks and possible damage to the bypass thermocouple A f CAUTION The bypass tee fitting must be held in place with a wrench when Note Support the NEPH assembly when loosening the captive hardware as to ensure the assembly does not drop during removal A 7 At the bypass tee on the outlet side of the heated bench carefully use a small straight edge screwdriver to gently pull the mini stinger straight out of the bypass tee While
66. inch nuts from the mounting bracket and remove the heated bench assembly Use caution when removing the heated bench as the actuator shaft and spring are not fixed to the assembly and can drop out during the removal process Note ball valve orientation 9 Install the new heated bench assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use caution to ensure the actuator shaft and spring are properly aligned with the actuator when reinstalling the heated bench back into the system Verify that the ball valve is in the close position and matches the removal orientation Use the following procedure to replace the valve manifold assembly Figure 7 13 Equipment Required Valve manifold assembly Wrench 7 8 inch and 11 16 inch Phillips screwdriver 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the top cover of the probe monitor to access internal components Thermo Fisher Scientific A Nuts 2 Power Connection 3 Nuts 2 Servicing TEOM Board Replacement CAUTION When removing the top cover remo
67. internal RH Temperature is recommended to be done by a trained technician Neph Int Temp The internal temperature can be adjusted once the system has stabilized at temperature You can use the NEPH BLOCK temperature to calibrate the Internal NEPH Temp this will be approximate This is done through the service menu Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Service gt Nepheleometer Calibrations gt Neph INT Temp The internal RH sensor is calibrated at the factory and is not able to be calibrated by the user Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration Nephelometer Neph Source To adjust the nephelometer light source place the instrument into Purge mode From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode toggle on Return to the Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Neph Source set the LED Current to 65 mA 5 mA by one of the following a Adjust the value of the source and read the source current value b The second option is to use CLINK set neph src level xxx where xxx 0 255 To read back the LED Current either the Diagnostics gt Nephelometer Menu or through the use of the CLINK neph ired Read the RefDet volts This is influenced by the setting of the LED current c Target is 2 500 V 3 or 0 075 VDC d The reference detector volts are always trying to maintain the value of 2 5 V while source current being applied e Usi
68. is used to enter strings consisting of letters numbers and other characters The cursor may be positioned within the entry line using the Jand gt keys If a character is entered over an existing character that character will be overwritten Use the and keys to switch between the entry line and the keyboard as well as to move within the keyboard To select a character to add to the string use the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character and then press the key to add that character to the entry line On the right side of the keyboard are special functions BKSP is used to move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left deleting the character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any character at or to the right of the cursor one place to the left PAGE is used to change the keyboard character page For the English language this switches between upper and lower case alphabetic characters SAVE stores the string from the entry line into the parameter Alternately if the active cursor is moved to the entry line may be pressed to store the string from the entry line into the parameter LH pirri MAMA The PM CEMS utilizes the menu driven firmware as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing sel
69. securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 12 6 Pop the motherboard off of the support bracket and remove the motherboard Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Interface Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement 7 To install the motherboard follow the previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 3 Refer to Figure 7 34 and Figure 7 35 for electrical connections Equipment Required Measurement interface board Phillips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 2 Unplug all connectors from the measurement interface board Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate re connection 3 Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop the measurement interface boar
70. the filter lies between the tines of the fork Figure 5 6 Do not touch the filter with your fingers Figure 5 6 Filter Tool with Clean Filter 2 Lightly place the hub of the filter onto the tip of the tapered element then slide the tool toward the notch and remove Figure 5 7 and Figure 5 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 7 Preventive Maintenance TEOM Filter Replacement Filter Filter change notch Filter post Figure 5 7 Empty Mass Transducer with Filter Change Notch Figure 5 8 Placing the Filter on the Post 3 Turn the tool upside down place the bottom of the spring loaded filter exchange tool on top of the filter and apply downward pressure until the filter tool stops Figure 5 9 and Figure 5 10 Figure 5 9 Back of Filter Exchange Tool Figure 5 10 Setting the Filter 4 Install the mass transducer back into the unit 5 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Sample Pump Thermo Fisher Scientific Rebuild Preventive Maintenance Sample Pump Rebuild Use the following procedure to rebuild the sample pump Figure 5 1 1 To replace the pump see Internal Pump Replacement in the Servicing chapter Equipment Required Pump repair kit Allen wrench 3mm Phillips screwdriver Slotted screwdriver Wrench 9 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded ant
71. the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks See Figure 5 35 3 When the Probe Monitor is removed from the stack the leak check for the front section is more comprehensive a Cap off DILI and the BYPASS with 3 8 Swagelok caps on the rear panel of the Probe Monitor b Connect the red tubing to Nozzle Tip and draw the vacuum back to 25 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes c Ifvacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks 4 To isolate the Dilution Assembly of the Mantle Remove the mantle shroud using 5 32 Allen head wrench clean off the stack debris using a stiff Nylon Brush and a pick to clean out the socket head screws a To remove the Dilution Module loosen the 9 16 nut closest to the mantle cap Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check Then loosen the 3 set screws 5 64th Allen Head Wrench that secure the dilution module to the sample tube slide off the Dilution module The Dilution Air Supply is the top fitting on the mantle cap connect the 1 4 inch port adapter with the nut See Figure 5 36 Connect the red silicone tubing to the port adaptor and draw the vacuum back to 25 in Hg and
72. the vacuum gauge Wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check c Ifvacuum reading drops troubleshoot for internal Bypass plumbing and fittings for leaks See Figure 5 24 Figure 5 24 Bypass Probe Monitor CAUTION All leak testing must be done with a vacuum pump Pressurizing the TEOM mass transducer can cause damage A 1 The Probe Monitor can be broken up to into two main sections separated by the vall valve The separation is from the Ball Valve ACTUATOR in the Heated Block assembly If system is not installed in the stack all testing can be done with the instrument power turned off and with the TEOM Transducer installed With the Probe Monitor installed in the stack a leak check of the back half can be accomplished by placing the instrument into Manual mode Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 25 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check a Turn down the heater settings This is done under Instrument Controls Menu Set Temperature Lower the Stinger and Bypass temperatures to 0 C below the current Stack Temperature b Place the unit into Manual mode via the Instrument Controls Menu Functional Mode c Place the Actuator Valve in the off position via the Instrument Controls Menu Valve Power This will clo
73. value on this screen before calibrating A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Probe Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibration gt Span Restore Default The Restore Default Calibration screen allows the user to reset the default Calibration values e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Probe Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibration gt Set Defaults Static Pressure The Static Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the static Calibration pressure offset zero span or reset default values The Pitot and TEOM DP Pressure screens function the same way e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Probe Calibration gt Static Pres Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 97 Operation Service Menu Calibrate Static Pressure Zero Calibrate Static Pressure Span 3 98 Model 3880 Instruction Manual DH pikari PLP The Calibrate Static Pressure Zero promts user zero both vacuum and flow while a zero is being applied When enter is pressed both vailues will consider their current voltage values to be the new zero value e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Probe Calibration gt Static Pres Calibration gt Zero ES DH DHDHM MAPA The Calibrate Static Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and pressure sensor calibration span point Note The operator should use an independent manometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this scr
74. various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Soft Keys Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function E Soft Keys The E soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below rt Run The Cr is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the current PM concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions sample conditions and mass sensor data Press and to scroll through the different Run screens Cm Menu The Cm is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press EB for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easilv distinguish them from the operating screens Press Cr to return to the Run screen or any other key to exit a help screen 9 J up Down The four arrow pushbuttons Os e Jan J 9 Left R
75. write command adds the word set in front of the command and provides an argument Command responses are generally echoed with a data element appended Note If the Service Mode is active C Link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally A If an incorrect command is sent an error message is generated The list of error responses is shown in Table B 1 The following example sends the incorrect command set unit vout range instead of the correct command set analog vout range Send set unit vout range Receive set unit vout range bad cmd Table B 1 Error Response Messages Command Response Description bad cmd Command is not recognized too high Supplied value is higher than the upper limit too low Supplied value is lower than the lower limit invalid string Supplied string invalid typically because a letter was detected when the value should be numeric data not valid Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command can t wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode can t mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in service mode The save and set save params commands duplicated for backward compatibility store parameters in FLASH memory It is important that this command be sent each time instrument parameters are changed If changes are not saved they will be lost i
76. your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A C 12 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following table will initiate the action triggered listed in the table This state must be held for at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers the appropriate action A Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually exclusive and will not be triggered if there is conflict Before you assert 1 one coil in a group make sure the other coils in the group are de asserted 0 A Table C 3 Write Coils for 3880 Coil Number Action Triggered 100 MONITOR MODE 101 PURGE MODE 102 MANUAL MODE 103 MASS MODE 104 BLOWBACK MODE 105 NEPH ZERO MODE 106 SINGLE SPAN CHECK MODE 107 MULTI SPAN CHECK MODE 108 PURGE ZERO CHECK 109 PURGE SPAN 1 CHECK 110 PURGE SPAN 2 CHECK 111 PURGE SPAN 3 CHECK 112 PURGE SPAN 4 CHECK 113 NEPH AUTO CAL 114 NEPH CAL SAVE 115 NEPH CAL REST 116 EXT ALARM Reading a Write Coil To read a write coil issue a read coil command for that coil For example to view the state of write coil 101 issue a read coil 101 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 38801 Instruction Manual C 13
77. 0 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M included with optional 1 0 Expansion Board 105968 00 SHARP PCB Assembly 104100 00 RH Temperature PCB Assembly Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing External Device Connection Components Ro 1 S a D L Ze p cs e A em Motherboard 24 VDC Power Supply Transformer Figure 7 2 Probe Controller Component Layout Top View 7 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components SSR Board Mass Flow Bos Bos Bos Elos Bes OOOOOO DC Bo oos vos 002 00 00 Boe Pump AAA AAA B a te Pressure Board MT 43 5149 E Fan AC Distribution Board Thermocouple MIB Board 146i Connection Board Figure 7 3 Probe Controller Component Layout Panel Down Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing External Device Connection Components Power Thermocouple Actuator Assembly Sample Valve Control Assembly Assembly Valve Manifold Assembly TEOM Mounting Assemblv Mass Transducer Nephelometer Assembly Heated Bench Assembly Figure 7 4 Probe Monitor Component Layout Power Thermocouple Accumulator Tank Assembly Pitot Tube Manifold Assembly Figure 7 5 Probe Monitor Top View 7 10 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partit
78. 07 00 Fan 24VDC 8630 Filter Guard Assembly w foam 7 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Replacement Parts List Part Number Description 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24VDC Controller 101055 00 AC Receptacle Assembly 114271 00 Fuse 5x20mm 10A Slow Blow 56 011830 Dilution Control Assembly MFC 112417 00 Mass Flow Controller Dilution MFC Only 112057 00 Mass Flow Assembly 0 5 LPM 102630 00 Mass Flow Controller 0 5 LPM MFC Only 113109 00 Mass Flow Controller Assembly Bypass Return 113123 00 Mass Flow Controller Bypass Return MFC Only 112120 00 Mems Sensor Assembly 112304 00 Regulator Assembly CDA 112241 00 Pressure Board Assembly 109992 00 SSR Board Assembly 111418 00 AC Distribution Board Assembly 102564 00 146i Connection Board Assembly 107339 00 Pressure Regulator 0 45 psi w Gauge 56 011760 Nephelometer Assembly 55 011695 Heated Bench Assembly 56 011870 Valve Manifold Assembly 32 011859 Valve 3 Way 220VAC 112150 00 Thermocouple Board Assembly 55 012003 Actuator Assembly 10 011864 Power Supply 24VDC Monitor 56 011955 Sample Control Valve Assembly 111022 00 Mass Transducer Interface Board 54 010901 Mass Transducer Assembly 55 012004 Accumulator Assembly 55 011945 Pitot Tube Manifold Assembly 32 011698 Valve Ball 56 012015 TE
79. 24V 2 PS SOL EXT INT J8 24V 2 NC Table 6 12 AC Distribution Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator AC IN J1 1 AC 2 AC 3 Ground PWR SPLY J2 1 AC 2 AC 3 Ground PSPB J3 1 AC 2 AC 3 Ground SPR1 J4 1 AC 2 AC 3 Ground Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 25 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 26 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator SPR2 J5 1 AC 2 AC 3 Table 6 13 Probe Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator RS485 J1 1 Ground 2 RS485 3 RS485 24V IN J2 24V 2 Ground DIL TC J3 DIL TC 2 DIL TC RS485 J4 Ground 2 RS485 3 RS485 24V OUT J5 24V 2 Ground STACK TC J6 STACK TC 2 STACK TC SPACE TC J7 SPARE TC 2 SPARE TC WDT DISABLE J8 WDT 2 Ground JTAG J9 TDO 2 TDI 3 TMS 4 TCK 5 RESET 6 Ground STINGER TC J10 1 STINGER TC 2 STINGER TC Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator NEPH TC J118 1 NEPH TC NEPH TC BY PASS TC J12 1 BY PASS TC 2 BY PASS TC Table 6 14 TEOM Head Controller Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label RS485 Reference Pin Designator J1 CO N Signal Description Ground RS485
80. 30 TEMP NEPH PCB 31 amp 32 TEMP TEOM TUBE 33 amp 34 TEMP TEOM CASE 35 amp 36 TEMP PROBE CONTROL 37 amp 38 PRES BAROMETER 39 amp 40 PRES PITOT 41 8 42 PRES STATIC 43 8 44 TEOM DP 45 8 46 FLOW NOZZLE 47 amp 48 FLOW NOZZLE AT STACK 49 8 50 FLOW DILUTION 51 amp 52 FLOW BYPASS 53 amp 54 FLOW SAMPLE 55 amp 56 FLOW SAMPLE CHECK 57 amp 58 DILUTION RATIO 59 amp 60 STACK VELOCITY Model 38801 Instruction Manual C 11 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Register Number Variable 61 8 62 NEPH SOURCE 63 amp 64 NEPH REFERENCE DETECTOR 65 amp 66 NEPH SPAN SOURCE 67 amp 68 NEPH SPAN REFERENCE 69 amp 70 NEPH RH 118 72 TEOM FREQUENCY 73874 TEOM STANDARD DEVIATION 75 8 76 TEOM KO 77 amp 78 FORWARD ZERO DRIFT 79 amp 80 FORWARD SPAN DRIFT 81 amp 82 TOTAL MASS 83 amp 84 NEPH GAINS 85 amp 86 NEPH SAMPLE DRIFT 87 amp 88 FORWARD INSTANTANEOUS 89 amp 90 TEOM AVERAGE 91 8 92 AIR TUBE POWER 93 amp 94 CASE POWER 95 amp 96 ANALOG 1 97 8 98 ANALOG 2 99 amp 100 ANALOG 3 101 amp 102 ANALOG 4 103 8104 ANALOG 5 105 amp 106 ANALOG 6 107 amp 108 ANALOG 7 109 amp 110 ANALOG 8 1118112 TEOM CYCLES 1138114 REFERENCE CLOCKS 1158116 BACK INSTANTANEOUS 1178118 CS IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on
81. 430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International 6 38 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 3880 subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced or is an expendable item not covered under warranty Expendable items are indicated by an asterisk in the Model 3880i Replacement Parts table For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode described in the Operation chapter includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations at the end of this chapter e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 7 4 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 e Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 11 e Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 13 e External Pump Replacement on page 7 13 e Fan Replacement on page 7 13 e Internal Pump Replacement on page 7 15 e Mass Flow Sample Assembly Replacement on page 7 16 e Bypass
82. Auto Update Sys Check Schedule Next Time Period Reset TEOM Total Mass Nozzle Select Nozzle 0 Nozzle 1 5 Flow Set Sample STP Datalogging Settings Select SREC LREC View Logged Data Erase Log Select Content Commit Content Reset to Default Content Configure Datalogging Communication Settings Serial Settings Instrument ID Geysytec Serial No Communication Protocol Streaming Data Config TCP IP Settings VO Configuration Output Relay Settings Digital Input Settings Analog Output Config Analog Input Config Solenoid States Solenoid 1 8 Screen Contrast Service Mode on off Date Time Timezone Program Versions Concentrations PM Wet PM Dry PM Fac Fwd 0 Fwd Inst TEOM Avg Fwd Avg TEOM Voltages Motherboard Interface Board PM 1 O Board Dual Nephelometer Board TEOM Board Thermocouple Board Temperatures Stack Dilution Stinger Bypass Neph Neph Block Neph PCB TEOM Air TEOM Case Probe Cntrl Pressures Barometric Pitot Static TEOM DP Flows Nozzle Dilution Bypass Sample Purge Sample Chk Dil Ratio Velocity Nephelometer Conc Inst Fwd 0 Source Ref Detector Span Source Span Ref RH TEOM Parameters Frequency Stdev Tube Temp Case Temp Tube Heat Case Het ko System Checks Analog Input Readings IN 1 8 Analog Input Voltages Analog In 1 8 Digital Inputs Input 1 16 Relay States Output 1 10 Test Analog Outputs ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 Current Channel 1 6 Instrument Configuration Pitot Tubes Contact Info
83. Cable Assembly 106027 00 Pressure Transducer to MIB Cable Assembly 11506 00 MIB to SSR Board Cable Assembly 11507 00 MIB to SSR Ribbon Cable Assembly 11505 00 Power Distribution to SSR Board Cable Assembly 113826 00 Transformer LG to SSR Conn Cable Assembly 11502 00 TEOM Internal Cable Assembly 11515 00 TEOM Nephelometer Internal Cable Assembly 11684 00 Transducer Interface Cable Assembly 112251 00 RS485 Heaters Cable Assembly Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific External Device Connection Components Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components 112145 00 Valves Power Cable Assembly Monitor 112253 00 Thermocouple Board Nephelometer TEOM Cable Assembly 112252 00 24V TC Board Cable Assembly Table 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and dataloggers to an iSeries instrument Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 102562 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional 102645 00 Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6279 Cable RS 232 Six Feet optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard 103084 0
84. Contact Information The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information Alarms Menu The alarms menu allows the user to view a set of alarms for different boards and displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarms Menu many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed Items displayed are determined by the options installed To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press ol If the readings go beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu All minimum and maximum concentration screens function the same way If any alarms are active the alarm bell icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar e Inthe Main
85. Cos desit x ar lame es 3 29 Configure Datalopgitig win iae tad D ect tici dts 3 29 Logging E 3 30 Memory Allocation Derrida 3 30 RECKEN EE 3 30 Eas Status Data iu ase e eu de eui ed p addi 3 31 Communication Settings amas epe aste de guarani santa o no ipe tu PORRO 3 31 E 3 32 Baud EE 3 32 Data Bits ss sanear Ee 3 32 Du t D ME d 3 33 Stop DS A A ii 3 33 RS 232 RS 485 electo 3 33 Tastrament AD las dada aaa eS 3 34 Gesytec Serial Nui Der ein adve Gto tn Ad aa 3 34 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Communication Protocolar iaa 3 35 Streaming Data Configuration cugat 3 35 Streaming Data Intervalo allel ened Seek 3 36 Select Stream Dita ata 3 36 Concentrations ueber eiie sioe ee ege e eire end 3 36 Other Mee 3 37 Other Measurements 2 eiii ed eei as reed ide 3 38 Analog Inputs eet npe He itt hen ce ebd 3 38 TCP IP Settings eegend Greter gege EES 3 39 Use DECS E 3 39 IP ART ARES ce nes cies sa Ra It estes uto 3 40 Nesta bs la 3 40 Default Gateway ay ack RO na eei 3 40 Host Names oe nod naan once PE o 3 41 Network Time Protocol Server eee 3 41 I O Configuration ecce eae peto laria b E Pe eet reda 3 41 Output Relay Settings arneu a n i E a 3 42 EE 3 42 Instrument A ai ee a E A i 3 43 A ME Sp co SARA A SR NR RR staal 3 43 IDE RR RR DR CAR RN UR teasers 3 44 Nola ta nia 3 45 Digital TnpuES cra iia 3 46 EE 3 46 o Action sauce gy RR RD DR asta e EDNA E RE 3 46 Analog Output Configuration Select Channel
86. DBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Coil status 1 indicates active state A Table C 1 Read Coils for 3880i Coil Number 0 Status NONE 1 SERVICE LOCAL REMOTE MONITOR MODE MASS MODE PURGE MODE oO oo SS wo N BLOW BACK MODE Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Coil Number Status 7 MANUAL MODE 8 NEPH ZERO MODE 9 NEPH SPAN MODE 10 SINGLE SPAN SYSTEM CHECK 11 MULTI SPAN SYSTEM CHECK 12 PURGE ZERO CHECK 13 PURGE SPAN 1 CHECK 14 PURGE SPAN 2 CHECK 15 PURGE SPAN 3 CHECK 16 PURGE SPAN 4 CHECK 17 GEN ALARM 18 TEMP STACK 19 TEMP DILUTION 20 TEMP STINGER 21 TEMP BYPASS 22 TEMP NEPH BLOCK 23 TEMP NEPH 24 TEMP NEPH PCB 25 TEMP TEOM CASE 26 TEMP TEOM TUBE 27 TEMP PROBE CONTROL 28 PRES BAROMETER 29 PRES STATIC 30 PRES PITOT 31 PRES TEOM DP 32 FLOW BYPASS 33 FLOW DILUTION 34 FLOW TEOM 35 FLOW NOZZLE 36 FLOW STINGER 37 FLOW DILUTION RATIO 38 SAMPLE FLOW PERCENT DRIFT 39 VELOCITY 40 PM WET Model 38801 Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Coil Number Status 41 PM DRY 42 PM FACTOR 43 NEPH FORWARD 44 NEPH BACK 45 NEPH FORWARD AVERAGE 46 NEPH SOURCE 41 NE
87. Diagnostics gt Voltages EH DHOB E EM a EA DE Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Motherboard Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Diagnostics Menu Interface Board Voltages 1 0 Board Voltages Dual Nephelometer Board Voltages 3 60 Model 3880 Instruction Manual REE MERA Set i ots d de Zoe PT ON Pi EE i The Interface Board screen read only is used to display the current voltages In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Interface Board PM PET PRIEST Ver rd Lr To Tp DH vided ML PRA The 1 O Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the I O expansion board In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board PEDIA TREE ee A O Pri The Dual Nephelometer Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Dual Nephelometer Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu TEOM Board The TEOM Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt TEOM Board EH DHOBM r PAS Thermocouple Board The Thermocouple Board screen read only is used to displa
88. EE 7 68 System Description es MC 8 1 Eai Nes cosa O 8 1 Probe Montoro lada eege 8 2 Dilution Noreste ein Se hae uoce rema ed 8 2 Mantena dE oi oe ed PER d Medio ree a 8 2 Heated Block ini 8 2 INephelometet oec ce eodd a dioit e dose 8 3 TEOM iris M 8 3 Pneumatic Cont di cos e a 0 tm CE 8 3 Temperature C ontro oa sia estas Get nee oa E 8 3 BO WEST pv isa tas hare Naat eats Ad E ra 8 3 Probe Controller za opened lta dein lios 8 3 Dilution MPG usina 8 5 Bypass RS 8 5 A 8 5 Bypass PUMP AAA 8 5 Gelee Duties toic tir Pree viper ada ppa Ea ga ca na 8 5 Pneumatic Umbilieal 2 tut eee ett rae eee idead 8 5 Electrical E 8 5 idis UE E 8 5 Instrument Controls asa tot eed Lone oen ete feta 8 5 Monitoring ep 8 6 tee EE 8 6 Output Communication sacra ee ao ca ci a cn een 8 6 Electronics M 8 7 Motera esci Ri ve inei aret sad PU n daga 8 7 External Contect rs asas seas nd Ra ue rele 8 8 Internal Connectors ecce need aea d i cu euasit 8 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Measurement Interface Board caia nitet acti 8 8 Measurement Interface Board Connectorg eese 8 8 SSR Board A uet pe II et Fuel dul as ati tet uten n 8 8 Pressure Sensor Assemblraiin iaa 8 9 Ee Board asas cue tere ee alan bes aS 8 9 Front Panel Connector Board eese 8 9 MI A i a i E a E 8 9 IF CS Gp OMe MUS cate edet ON 8 9 Analog Voltage Outputs dein scere ee
89. ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device IDs 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Thermo Fisher Scientific Read Inputs MODBUS Protocol Function Codes A Slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the instrument The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x03 Read Input Registers 0x04 Force Write Single Coil 0x05 0x06 Read Exception Status If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Function Codes below In MODBUS over Serial an error check i
90. If the TEOM air tube temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt TEOM Air Tube 3 76 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt TEOM Air Tube gt Min or Max Probe Control The Probe Control Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the Temperature selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 10 to 50 C If the probe control temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Probe Cntrl e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Probe Cntrl gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Alarms Menu PME la EE Pressure The Pressure submenu allows the user to view and set the selected pressure alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Barometric Pressure The Barometric Pressure screen screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 500 to 800 mmHg If the barometric pressure readi
91. MMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Identification Thermo Fisher Scientific Number Commands Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 3880 using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP IP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interch
92. Model 3880 Instruction Manual Particulate Matter Continuous Emissions Monitoring System Part Number 112217 00 9Dec2013 O 2013 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermoscientific com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermoscientific com WEEERoHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing maintaining and servicing the Model 38807 It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent eq
93. OM Bypass Air Tube Assembly 55 012044 Dilution Assembly 37 012045 Nozzle Standard Wet 114174 00 Stack Temperature Thermocouple 3 feet Mantle Kit 114175 00 Stack Temperature Thermocouple 5 feet Mantle Kit Model 3880i Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Cable List Cable List 7 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Part Number Description 56 011916 0036 Dilution Supply Assembly 3 feet Mantle 56 011916 0060 Dilution Supply Assembly 5 feet Mantle 56 011915 0036 Sample Tube Assembly 3 feet Mantle 56 011915 0060 Sample Tube Assembly 5 feet Mantle 114172 00 Dilution Temperature Thermocouple 3 feet Mantle Kit 114173 00 Dilution Temperature Thermocouple 5 feet Mantle Kit 59 012050 Leak Check Kit Expendable item not covered by warranty Table 7 2 describes the Model 3880 cables See the Troubleshooting chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 3880 Cables 103284 00 Mass Flow Controller Cable Assembly 112240 00 Check Flow Sensor Cable Assembly 111513 01 Dil C to Gas C Cable Assembly 111513 02 PI 4 to Gas E Cable Assembly 111513 03 PD 5 to Gas F Cable Assembly 111513 04 PS 6 to Z A Cable Assembly 112143 00 RS485 Heaters Cable Assembly Controller 112146 00 Valves Power Cable Assembly Controller 113104 00 Pump Conn Cable Assembly 101267 00 Fan Power
94. PAN SOURCE c1 FP com SPAN IRED K SPAN IRED A Ground SPAN REF PD NC Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 31 Troubleshooting PM CEMS Board Diagrams PM CEMS Board Figure 6 2 through Figure 6 5 are board level connection diagrams for the Diagram S PM CEMS See Table 6 17 through Table 6 26 for status LEDs fuses and test points J8 E LPL 20 DIL MFC pa EY REG SAR F2 Die T SSR CNTRL wd EI jess THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC amp PM CEMS TC MIB BOARD REU A BOARD 112165 00 ASSEMBLY 112156 00 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement Interface 6 32 Model 388017 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific asf N LU U37 C131 U38 O a C86 Si Sei Borss 03008 od R87 s a D coc res O o 3 2695 fs R97 onm r3 amp u SU ceo D14 0 PM CEMS TEOM HERD CONTROLLER D 1 if BD 111022 00 9 40 MN ASY 111023 00 E 80000591 XF3 ms me R20 dis et 1 R61 R49 R33 JI SE GE er Oha 00000 om 25 55 us uit E C45 Be E enn LAS ee E o S og om 010 ines H 1 as 46 o C50 10223 a R76 vee D o E e sl d uo OO NE Lens E Ego 2328 811 Troubleshooting PM CEMS Board Diagrams Figure 6 4 Board Level Connection Diagram TEOM Head Controller Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 33 Troubleshooting PM CEMS Board Diagrams os e A d PUMP RELAY E 014 E D D NEPH RELAY TI ER SPARE RELAY E
95. PH REFERENCE DETECTOR 48 NEPH SPAN SOURCE 49 NEPH SPAN REFERENCE 50 NEPH RH 51 NEPH FORWARD PERCENT ZERO DRIFT 52 NEPH FORWARD PERCENT SPAN DRIFT 53 NEPH CONCENTRATION INST 54 TEOM 55 TEOM INST 56 TEOM FREQ 57 TEOM STANDARD DEVIATION 58 TEOM KO 59 MIB STATUS 60 1 0 BOARD STATUS 61 THERMOCOUPLE BOARD STATUS 62 NEPH STATUS 63 TEOM STATUS In addition to the coils listed in the Read Coils table coils in the Write Coils table can also be read IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the register number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the instrument A Note For additional information on how to read registers and interpret the data refer to the 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers section in this appendix A C 10 Model 3880i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Table C 2 Read Registers for 38801 Register Number Variable 0 NONE 1 amp 2 PM WET 384 PM DRY 5 amp 6 PM FACTOR 7 amp 8 FORWARD CONC 9 amp 10 BACK CONC 1 amp 12 TEOM CONC 13814 FORWARD CONC AVG 15 amp 16 TEOM INSTANTANEOUS 17 amp 18 TEMP STACK 19 amp 20 TEMP DILUTION 21822 TEMP STINGER 23824 TEMP BYPASS 25 amp 26 TEMP NEPH 27 amp 28 TEMP NEPH BLOCK 29 amp
96. PO TEOM The TEOM submenu allows the user to view and set the selected nephelometer alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms TEOM FERIR MERSE Pi Ta DH DEM Eb O Ai L A Pl nl EE Beene BEE EE TEOM Frequency The TEOM Frequency screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 280 to 310 Hz If the 3 90 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu TEOM frequency reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt TEOM Frequency GC oi mata e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt TEOM Frequency gt Min or Max TEOM Std Dev The TEOM Std Dev screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 0005 to 01 Hz If the TEOM std dev reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt TEOM Std Dev Cop mata Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 91 Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt TEOM gt TEOM Std Dev gt Min or Max MET EIS Perte GER Ji E a d de Zoe EOSGROGUPSIQA Pi
97. RNING Pneumatic umbilical must be supported during operations installation and removal of probe monitor A Blow out the pneumatic umbilicals with clean dry air before installing Connect the freeze protected umbilical to both the probe and the instrument connector side goes toward the instrument chassis Ensure that the umbilical is properly strain relieved on the outside of the instrument to prevent excessive strain on the monitor assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Figure 2 2 Component Layout Open View of Monitor Assembly Model 3880i Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Setup Procedure Setup Procedure The Model 3880 is capable of measuring filterable particulate matter from laboratory generated aerosol or as emitted from a coal fired boiler incinerator or cement kiln The procedure for setting up the Model 3880 will only vary with regard to probe length probe controller mounting and umbilical length logistics Be sure to review the air and power supply requirements before install The Model 38807 is comprised of the following major assemblies 1 Probe Mantle 2 Probe Monitor Enclosure 3 Umbilical Pneumatic bundle and 2 electrical 4 Probe Controller 5 Pump Assembly Please note that the Probe Mantle is shipped connected to the Probe Monitor Enclosure Depending upon the site specifics the Probe Mantle can be removed from the Probe Monitor Enclosure and installed sequentially pendin
98. Rear Panel Pin Connections 1 2 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Lonfouratons 0 12 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration ss 0 12 Table B 1 Error Response Messages sss B 2 Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commande B 3 Table C 1 Read Coils for 3880i is C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for 2001 C 11 Table C 3 Write Coils for 3880 C 13 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Thermo Scientific Model 3880 Particulate Matter Continuous Emissions Monitoring System PM CEMS is designed to extract dilute and transport a flue gas sample for the measurement of a wet based filterable particulate matter concentration The system is comprised of a Model 3880 Probe Controller and a Probe Monitor along with optional peripheral components such as a zero air supply freeze protected umbilical and probe controller enclosure For details of the instrument s theory of operation and product specifications see the following topics e Theory of Operation on page 1 2 e Specifications on page 1 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this Model 38807 We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this instrument For more information on servici
99. Return Mass Flow Assembly Replacement on page 7 16 e Dilution Control Assembly Replacement on page 7 17 e Pressure Board Replacement on page 7 18 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Mems Sensor Replacement on page 7 19 e SSR Board Replacement on page 7 20 e Pitot Valve Replacement on page 7 21 e DC Power Supply Replacement on page 7 21 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 22 e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 24 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 25 e I O Expansion Board Replacement on page 7 27 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 29 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 30 e Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7 31 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 32 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 33 e Nephelometer Replacement on page 7 34 e Heated Bench Replacement on page 7 36 e Valve Manifold Replacement on page 7 38 e TEOM Board Replacement on page 7 39 e Actuator Replacement on page 7 41 e Sample Control Valve Replacement on page 7 42 e DC Power Supply Monitor Replacement on page 7 44 e Thermocouple Board Replacement on page 7 46 e Thermocouple Temperature Probe Calibration on page 7 48 e Mantle Removal on page 7 50 e Dilution Supply Assembly Removal on page 7 52 e Sample Line Assembly Removal on page 7 54 e Dilution Thermocouple Removal on p
100. T Diz OIL RELAY ES ou EXT PUMP RELAY T 08 BY PASS RELAY CO 07 wi K2 K3 ka Ks ke K xa ks xo xii vz x13 STINGER RELAY CI SSA DRIVER o r E pe ua LIGIER JO ba 5967 EN E EN EN E cx 6e H so sos gh earen x Ae e OOCEYIY3 crx ec 1 Bep at Bec m pot E as ES H ech of e 2A red as a J6 Lm uu aec on Ze R205 EB Ze apese 23 LM Hl t D OD sis gg AC SOL VALVES FC VALUES AC VALUES Figure 6 5 Board Level Connection Diagram SSR Driver Table 6 17 MIB Status LEDs Designator Color Desciption D11 Green Processor Status 1Y D12 Green Processor Status 2Y D38 Green 24V Power In Table 6 18 MIB Test Points Designator Color Desciption TP1 Black A Gnd TP2 Black A Gnd TP3 Black D Gnd TP4 Orange D Gnd TP5 Orange 5V D TP6 Orange 5V A TP Orange 3 3V A 6 34 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting PM CEMS Board Diagrams Designator Color Desciption TP8 Red 3 3V D TP9 Red 15VA TP10 Red 15VA TP11 Red 5V Serv Table 6 19 SSR Driver Board Status LEDs Designator Color Desciption D1 Red Stinger Relay Fuse D2 Red Bypass Relay Fuse D3 Red Ext Pump Relay Fuse D7 Red Singer Relay D8 Red Bypass Relay D9 Red Iso 108V Fuse D11 Red Ext Pump Relay D12 Red Dilution Relay D13 Red Spare D14 Red Neph
101. Thermocouple Temperature Probe Calibration A Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 Remove the thermocouple board 8 Install the new thermocouple board by following the previous steps in reverse The thermocouple PCBA has five individual port connectors that monitor the thermocouple readings In the event of a loss of power or communications with a thermocouple the heater will turn off To complete this calibration it is recommended to use a thermocouple calibrator and reader eg Tegam model 840A Refer to Figure 7 27 for thermocouple placement Equipment needed Thermocouple calibrator reader eg Tegam model 840A Thermocouple cable male to male Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Remove the side cover of the Probe Monitor to access internal components 2 Under Instrument Controls menu Place system into Service Mode 3 Service Menu Temperature Calibration 4 Select NEPH BLK OFFSET Nephelometer Block Thermocouple a Set the Thermocouple Calibrator to 100 C and disconnect the Thermocouple cable from the port on the Nephelometer b Connect to the Nephelometer Thermocoup
102. UT RETURN CDA f SPARE ES BYPASS IN E AEE amp CDA 25 100 PSI SAMPLE IN 3 ZERO AR PLANT SUPLY 75 PSI d SPARE e SAMPLE RELIEF VALVE ASSY E 113547 D0 1 81 SAMPLE DUI PURGE 3 Se o PURGE 3 OPEN PORT 4 NO CONNECTION PD 5 e H fa PS 6 o PD 5 SPARE SS SPARE o PS 8 WHT WIRE GRN WIRE WIRE Poy 3X ELECTRICAL FLYING LEADS PLANT SUPLY 80 100 PSI B SLPM TO BE WIRED BY CUSTOMER FREEZE PROTECTION O o PUMP INTAKE EXHUBST INTAKE 10FT TUBING ASSY 113258 00 EXTERNAL PUMP UMP ASSY 113277 00 Figure 2 11 System Plumbing 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 2 11 Installation Probe Monitor Probe Monitor Use the following procedure to install the Model 3880 PM CEMS probe monitor Refer to Figure 2 10 for System Plumbing on page 2 10 1 Ona bench or floor taking care not to damage the nozzle and dilution module remove if necessary line the mantle up with probe enclosure with 3 4 inch fitting in 12 o clock position Mantle Bolts 4 Figure 2 12 New View of Mantle and Monitor 2 Bolt mantle in place with four 5 8 inch 11 x 1 1 2 inch bolts and split lock washers Note If there is sufficient space the probe monitor with the mantle connected should be arranged near the monitoring port If some instances the mantle may have to be inserted first and the probe monitor enclosure added ne
103. Unplug the power cord open fuse draw and check fuse s Unplug power cord disconnect switch and check operation Does not start display background lit AC line voltage outside limits Front panel ribbon cable not connected properly LCD flat cable not connected properly Ensure AC line voltage is within system operating range Ensure cable is seated properly into connector Ensure cable is seated properly and connector is in locked position 24 VDC monitor cable not connected properly Ensure power supply 24 VDC monitor cable is properly connected to power supply and to 24 VDC on motherboard Model 3880i Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Malfunction Possible Cause Action Faulty or corrupted firmware processor board Faulty motherboard Attempt to reload latest version firmware Replace processor board Replace motherboard TEOM alarms No power to probe monitor No power to TEOM only Check umbilical connections for proper seating Check umbilical for damage Check for proper seating of TEOM power cable For further troubleshooting of TEOM alarms refer to Table 6 6 Nephelometer alarms No power to probe monitor No power to nephelometer only Check umbilical connections for proper seating Check umbilical for damage Check for proper seating of nephelometer power cable For further troubleshooting of nephelometer alarms r
104. age 7 56 e Stack Thermocouple Removal on page 7 58 e System Drawings on page 7 60 e Service Locations on page 7 68 7 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A A Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A DO NOT point the photomultiplier tube at a light source This can permanently damage the tube Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully a Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol a
105. age to the Monitor chassis Allow time for the mantle to cool before starting disassembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Sample Line Assembly Removal 3 Disconnect the two Monitor side covers 4 Disconnect the Dilution and Stack thermocouple connections 5 Disconnect the Dilution and Stinger heater connections 6 Disconnect the 1 4 inch Dilution 1 line at the elbow connection at the Mantle 7 Loosen the 3 4 inch Dump line at the reducer connection Do not completely remove this nut as the ferrules are PTFE and can fall off during the removal process 8 Disconnect the Stinger Tube Face Seal fitting from the Heated Bench Assembly 9 Disconnect the three Pitot lines from the Pitot Tube Manifold assembly 10 If needed use a stiff nylon brush and a pick to clean off stack residue from the Mantle Cap socket head mounting screws Using a 5 16 inch Allen Wrench remove the Mantle Cap mounting screws 11 Carefully dislodge the Mantle Cap from the Mantle Chassis and slowly pull the Mantle Cap with the internal assemblies straight out while guiding the cables and dump tube through the Mantle Chassis 12 At the Mantle Cap disconnect the 1 2 inch Swagelok fitting of the Sample Line Assembly and remove the assembly 13 Install the new Sample Line Supply Assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use silver goop thread lubricant on the Mantle Cap mounting screws when reinstalling Thermo Fisher Scientific Mode
106. ailable be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the side doors of the probe monitor to access internal components u mmm Ze ei mal CS LT IB H 332 EPIA E Thermocouple Heater Power Connection 1 8 Purge Figure 7 14 Replacing the Nephelometer 3 Loosen the inlet and outlet connections 4 Unplug the 1 8 inch purge line 5 Disconnect the thermocouple heater and power connections Figure 7 15 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Heated Bench Replacement Heated Bench Replacement A 7 36 Model 38801 Instruction Manual 6 Loosen the four captive screws on the nephelometer mounting plate and remove the nephelometer 7 Loosen nephelometer inlet and outlet fitting Captive Screws 4 Nephelometer Inlet Fitting m UIT TA W s n ES a Figure 7 15 Nephelometer Connections 8 Install the new nephelometer by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the heated bench assembly Figure 7 16 Equipment Required Heated bench assembly Wrench 1 inch 1 1 2 inch and 11 16 inch P
107. analog output The operator must connect a volt Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 107 Operation Service Menu Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale Analog Input Calibration 3 108 Model 3880 Instruction Manual meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter for a voltage channel or either 0 or 4 mA for a current channel depending on the selected range See the set output to field on the display e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Zero PE OT TRAST mTOR gH eb Ji dia eiu La A M 1i Pedi The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until the meter reads the value shown in the set output to field in either V or mA depending on the selected output channel e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale CEDOT TEILT rm Prid ifel L The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the 8 analog input channels at both zero and full scale The analog input calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument s
108. ange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent of the instrument s identification number plus 128 For example if the instrument ID is set to 25 then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 153 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument parameters via remote However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands can be sent in either uppercase or lowercase characters Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the example below begins with the ASCII character code 166 decimal which directs the command to the Model 38804 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal Model 3880 Instruction Manual Bi C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 2 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Many of the commands have two forms One form reads parameter from the instrument s memory and the other writes or updates a parameter The syntax for a
109. anual Analog Output Calibration ariadna 3 107 Analog Output Calibrate Zero tL better 3 107 Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale tn 3 108 Analog Input Calibration ainda 3 108 Analog Input Calibrate Eege 3 109 Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale aee dices 3 109 Display EE 3 110 Restore User Defaults cniinn niin eege 3 110 Restore Factory Defaults ii 3 110 Password Meninas loaded 3 111 Set Password eege RE ERR tcu bd cae eege 3 111 Lock Instrument soseo be natale Modi did 3 112 Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation 3 112 Change Password EE 3 112 Remove Password rs es curas qaad sagt oes ERU eege 3 112 Unlock Iosgrupaent serge mie tati 3 113 Calibration sas 4 1 Pressure Sensors iia cti 4 1 Sample MFG aro idilio 4 4 MS EE 4 5 Bypass EE 4 6 Nephelometer Purge Flow Calibration session teeth 4 6 Nephel meter veria tb ek er hast uA d SR teo ERRARE 4 7 Lera Cal Vales sedo cu a M Rote oe loan tt Lee di 4 7 Span Cal Values aiii 4 7 EEN 47 EEN 4 7 Nephi Source aeneae duo nt e unu 4 8 EE RR PISAR RDI utero Sl DE teen 4 8 TEO E 4 8 Preventive Maintenance ssssssesssesssssssessssssessseesssesssesssesssesssnessneesneeess 5 1 KEENT 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Schedule iut aes Tees 5 2 Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning rote tenete 5 3 HEPA Filter Replacement sic ooo a tod ieu E 5 4 TEOM Filter Replace mentos eine 5 5 Removing a TEOM Filter a 5 6 Installing a TEOM Filt
110. arth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing SSR Board Replacement 1 20 SSR Board Replacement Model 3880 Instruction Manual 2 Remove the outlet line from the sensor 3 Remove the two mounting screws from assembly 4 Remove the assembly from the bulkhead fitting 5 Remove the cable from the sensor and remove sensor assembly 6 To install the new mems sensor assembly follow previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the SSR board Figure 7 3 Refer to Figure 7 34 for electrical connections Equipment Required SSR board Phillips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step 2 Unplug all connectors Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate reconnection 3 Unscrew the seven screws that secure the SSR board to the side panel Remove the SSR board 4 To insta
111. ation with automatic flow control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts Ifa period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the
112. ations on page 6 38 for contact information In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 1 provides troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience a general instrument problem Table 6 2 provides troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience a probe controller problem Table 6 3 provides troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument alarm problem Table 6 4 provides troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience a power thermocouple assembly problem Table 6 5 provides troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience a nephelometer problem Model 3880i Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Table 6 6 provides troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience a TEOM problem Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction Possible Cause Action No concentration on Instrument mode Ver
113. atures Pressing _ f Jand Y jwill scroll through the different Run screens Title Bar CTEPRMPIPZTIIEZ Status Bar Status Bar Icons Pressures Screen The Pressures Run screen normally displays the current PM pressures Pressing f Jand will scroll through the different Run screens Title Bar Status Bar Status Bar Icons 3 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview Flow Screen The Flow Run screen normally displays the current PM flows Pressing t and Y will scroll through the different Run screens Title Bar Status Bar Status Bar Icons BO T as EEE Neph TEOM Screen The Neph TEOM Run screen displays the current nephelometer and TEOM data Pressing Ce Jand will scroll through the different Run screens Title Bar H L TEDMN Status Bar GE Ee amp Ze A Status Bar Icons TRH oh Zoe EOSGLOGUPSILQIO A EE EE ESTE I TEm DH DEM Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880i Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Averaging Time Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration appears above the Main Menu and submenus in every screen The Service menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode ec DH D see Service Mode later in this chapter e Use
114. awer located on the AC power connector 3 Ifeither fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and re connect power cord Use the following procedure to replace the pump 1 Remove power from the pump and remove the input and output lines 2 Install a new pump by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the fan Figure 7 7 Equipment Required Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing Fan Replacement Fan Phillips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter 3 Pull the connectors off the fan 4 Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan 5 Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse Mounting Screws 4 Filter Fan Guard Figure 7 7 Replacing the Fan 7 14 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Internal Pump Replacement Internal Pump Use the following procedure to replace the internal pump Fi
115. ay be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 19 200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e Streaming Data e Modbus Slave The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer data logger or PC A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the instrument to an IBM Compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the instrument to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Model 3880 Instruction Manual 8 11 System Description 1 0 Components RS 485 Connection Ethernet Connection 8 12 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configurations DB9Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configur
116. before removing transducer from the monitor Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance TEOM Filter Replacement TE Handle Mass Transducer Assembly Removing a TEOM Filter 5 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual H NC icp A TE ai A Nat CR E AA Zac Figure 5 2 Replacing the TEOM Filter Use the following procedure to remove a TEOM filter 1 Carefully insert the lower fork of the filter exchange tool under the TEOM filter that is in the mass transducer so that the filter disk is between the lower fork and the upper tab of the filter exchange tool The tines of the lower fork should straddle the hub of the filter base Figure 5 3 and Figure 5 4 Figure 5 3 Filter Tool Figure 5 4 Removing the TEOM Filter with the Filter Tool Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance TEOM Filter Replacement 2 Gently pull straight up from the tapered element TE lifting the TEOM filter from the TE Figure 5 5 Figure 5 5 Removing the TE Filter Note Do not twist or tilt the filter exchange tool from side to side while removing the filter from the TE This will damage the TE A Installing a TEOM Use the following procedure to install a TEOM filter Filter 1 Clean the exchange tool with canned air or a clean cloth Use it pick up a new TEOM filter from the box of filters so that the filter disk lies between the fork and the upper tab of the tool and the hub of
117. bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Sample Drift e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Sample Drift gt Min or Max Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 83 Operation Alarms Menu Dilution Ratio Flow The Dilution Ratio Flow screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 2 to 25 If the dilution ratio flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Dilution Ratio e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Dilution Ratio gt Min or Max Nephelometer The Nephelometer submenu allows the user to view and set the selected nephelometer alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer 3 84 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu EH iai Neph Source The Neph Source screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 60 to 100 mA If the neph source reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Sourc
118. board If error follows thermocouple replace thermocouple Otherwise replace thermocouple board assembly Nephelometer temperature alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Faulty bypass heater Disconnected cable Check cable connections Bypass heater has two thermal fuses on top of assembly Place system in Purge mode Set all temperatures to 0 C to reset thermal fuses Verify cable connections If cable connections are valid swap thermcouple connector with a known good connector on the thermocouple board If error follows thermocouple replace thermocouple Otherwise replace thermocouple board assembly Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Table 6 5 Troubleshooting Nephelometer Malfunction Nephelometer board failure Possible Cause External cable not connected Internal cable not connected Disconnected electrical umbilical Action Verify cable connection Verify cable connection Verify electrical umbilical connection Low high source current alarm Incorrect setting in the service menu nephelometer calibration Disconnected source ref det cable Verify that the source current is set to 6bmA 5mA Verify cable connection No nephelometer RH temperature readings Disconnected RH temp cable Verify cable connection Nephlelometer span source Nephelometer zero drift alarm Nephel
119. cal to the rear panel connector labeled RS485 HEAT and connect the grounding strap to the rear panel ground lug Connect the keyed electrical umbilical to the rear panel connector labeled VALVES POWER and connect the grounding strap to the rear panel ground lug Connect a suitable recording device to the rear panel connector See Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration in the Operations chapter for more information about the rear panel pin out Plug the probe controller into an outlet of the appropriate voltage and frequency Model 3880i Instruction Manual 2 9 Installation Probe Controller PROBE MONITOR 57 011699 im 1 ees DILUTION 2 DILUTION 2 ALTER BYPASS BYPASS S PETIR cps RETURN SPARE CDA SAMPLE SAMPLE SPARE PURGE 3 PI a m 5 PURGE 3 t PS 8 PD 65 PS 8 SPARE SPARE FILTER BYPASS FILTER ASSY d 55 012013 3 aT 1441 1 8T Figure 2 10 System Plumbing 1 2 10 Model 3880 Instruction Manual HEATED UMB 111761 XX Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Probe Controller HEATED UMB 111761 XX PROBE CONTROLLER 112006 00 3 81 DILUTION 1 35 DILUTION 2 C DILUTION 1 PROBE ENTRE BYPASS IN 2 Dan ER LUE Ure 3 BYPASS O
120. cetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A p 2 4 ea Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap Firmware Upd ates The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure Replacement Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 3880 major Parts List subassemblies Refer to Figure 7 x to identify the component location Table 7 1 Model 3880 Replacement Parts Part Number Description 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 110570 00 Processor Arcturus Board 109141 00 Motherboard Assembly 100539 00 Digital Output Board 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel Display 102014 00 1 0 Expansion Board 112156 00 Measurement Interface Board Assembly 114031 00 Step Down Transformer Assembly 113277 00 Pump External 113522 00 Pump Rebuild Kit Bypass 56 011841 Pump Internal 108002 00 Pump Rebuild Kit Internal 101688 00 Ambient Temperature Connector with Thermistor 1009
121. connections and Figure 7 35 for electrical connections Equipment Required Mass flow assembly 0 5 Ipm Wrench 9 16 inch Phillips screwdriver 1 and 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the top cover 2 Remove the plumbing from the inlet and outlet of the assembly 3 Disconnect the mass flow controller power cable 4 Loosen the two captive screws on the assembly mounting plate and remove the assembly 5 Install the new mass flow assembly by following the above directions in reverse 6 After installation of replacement assembly calibrate the instrument Refer to Sample MF on page 4 4 Use the following procedure to replace the bypass mass flow controller assembly Figure 7 3 Refer to Figure 7 31 for plumbing connections and Figure 7 35 for electrical connections Equipment Required Thermo Fisher Scientific Dilution Control Assembly Replacement A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Dilution Control Assembly Replacement Bypass return mass flow assembly Wrench 11 16 inch Phillips screwdriver
122. cted cable TEOM board in standby mode red led on constantly Blown fuse on TEOM board No 24 VDC power supplied or RS 485 communication Verify cable connections Press reset button need image to show then verify TEOM board voltage From Main Menu gt Diagnostics gt Voltage gt TEOM board Replace fuse Refer to Table 6 4 power thermocouple assy troubleshooting section TEOM frequency std and KO alarms together Disconnected transducer Re seat transducer assembly or replace transducer assembly Transducer assembly will not heat Heater temperature set too low Blown fuse on TEOM board Transducer not installed properly Disconnected transducer Faulty transducer Verify heater set temperature From Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Set Temperature gt TEOM Case Replace fuse Re install transducer assembly Verify transducer cable is connected to TEOM board Replace transducer assembly Air tube will not heat Heater temperature set too low Disconnected air tube cable Blown air tube heater fuse Faulty air tube assembly Faulty air tube thermisor Verify heater set temperature From Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Set Temperature gt TEOM Air Tube Verify air tube cable connected to TEOM board Replace air tube heater fuse on TEOM board Replace TEOM air tube assembly Repalce TEOM air tube assembly TEOM Dp pressure alarm Thermo F
123. ctions Disconnect the Dilution and Stinger heater connections Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 10 11 12 13 14 15 Servicing Dilution Thermocouple Removal Disconnect the 1 4 inch Dilution 1 line at the elbow connection at the Mantle Loosen the 3 4 inch Dump line at the reducer connection Do not completely remove this nut as the ferrules are PTFE and can fall off during the removal process Disconnect the Stinger Tube Face Seal fitting from the Heated Bench Assembly Disconnect the three Pitot lines from the Pitot Tube Manifold assembly If needed use a stiff nylon brush and a pick to clean off stack residue from the Mantle Cap socket head mounting screws Using a 5 16 inch Allen wrench remove the Mantle Cap mounting screws Carefully dislodge the Mantle Cap from the Mantle Chassis and slowly pull the Mantle Cap with the internal assemblies straight out while guiding the cables and dump tube through the Mantle Chassis At the Mantle Cap disconnect the 1 4 inch Swagelok Dilution Supply fitting and remove the assembly Take note of the orientation of the dilution thermocouple for reinstallation of the new assembly At the Dilution Supply assembly disconnect the 1 16 inch Swagelok fitting of the Dilution Thermocouple and remove the assembly Insert the new Dilution Thermocouple and Swagelok cap and ferrules into the Dilution Supply assembly but do not tighten down the cap Inser
124. d a corresponding user defined reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 5 volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Digital Output Relays Digital Inputs Serial Ports RS 232 Connection Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components The instrument includes one power fail relay on motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the instrument as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e Zero Gas Mode e Span Gas Mode The actual use of these inputs will vary based on instrument configuration The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the instrument The active state can be user defined in firmware Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple instruments m
125. d is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is not set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Set Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 111 Operation Password Menu Lock Instrument The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users cannot change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Lock Instrument BEBE MEE DH HOM EP Fiat LP PME la EE Cad Lock Unlock and If the instrument is locked via the front panel using Password gt Lock Local Remote Operation Instrument the instrument reports being in Remote mode In this mode the front panel is locked where data can be viewed settings can be viewed but not changed using the front panel interface and the remote Set commands are active If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password gt Unlock Instrument the instrument reports being in Local mode the front panel interface is unlocked and settings can be changed from the front panel Change Password The Change Password screen is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password Remove Password The Remove Password screen is use
126. d off from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board 4 To install the measurement interface board follow the previous steps in reverse 5 Re install the measurement case assembly Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Front Panel Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Front panel board amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop the board off of the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following the previous steps in reverse 7 32 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Mounting Studs 2 Ribbon Cables 3 lt lt LCD Module Replacement A A Thermo Fisher Scientific
127. d the DP low is connected to the tee reducer on the output line of the TEOM transducer Label the lines for reinstallation Loosen the TEOM tube VCO connection at the nephelometer and lift the TEOM tube straight up until it separates from the TEOM transducer inlet and move the assembly aside to access the TEOM board housing cover Note tubing orientation when reinstalling new board 1 8 Pneumatics Lines 6 iS 3 D a LT Figure 7 19 Replacing the TEOM Board 7 40 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Actuator Replacement 5 Remove the six screws on the housing cover and remove the cover 6 Remove all connections from the TEOM board and label connectors as needed for reassembly 7 Remove the four mounting screws on the TEOM board and remove the assembly 8 Install the new TEOM board by following the previous steps in reverse Actuator Use the following procedure to replace the actuator assembly Re p lacement Equipment Required Actuator assembly Wrench 11 16 inch and 3 8 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chas
128. d to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set 3 112 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Unlock Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Remove Password The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Unlock Instrument EH DHOB Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 113 Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Sensors Chapter 4 Calibration This chapter describes procedures for performing the necessary calibrations for the 38802 The Service mode must be enabled For details see the following topics e Pressure Sensors on page 4 1 e Sample MFC on page 4 4 e Dilution MFC on page 4 5 e Bypass MEC on page 4 6 e Nephelometer Purge Flow Calibration on page 4 6 e Nephelometer on page 4 7 The pressure sensor assembly is a PCB with up to five pressure sensors This step is needed if a Pitot tube option is installed An additional pressure sensor TEOM DP is added later with the Probe Monitor in Step 7 The Pressure sensor assembly includes 1 8 inch tygon lines that are glued to the tapered ports of each applicable pressure sensor or fit over a barbed sty
129. del 3880i Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Alarm Message Possible Cause Action Interface status alarm Disconnected cable No 24 VDC power Verify communications and 24 VDC cable connections Verify 24 VDC power input If no 24 VDC replace power supply TCB status alarm No communications Refer to Table 6 4 Power Thermocouple assy troubleshooting section Dual nephelometer status alarm No communications Refer to Table 6 5 Nephelometer troubleshooting section TEOM status alarm No communications Refer to Table 6 6 TEOM troubleshooting section 1 0 exp status alarm Disconnected cable Faulty board Verify cable connection Replace 0 exp board Table 6 4 Troubleshooting Power Thermocouple Assembly Malfunction TCB alarm Possible Cause Disconnected umbilical Disconnected cable from power supply or RS 485 cable Faulty power supply Blown fuse on thermocouple board assembly Action Verify umbilical connections Verify cable connections Verify 220 VAC to input of power supply Verify 24 VDC to output of power supply If no 24 VDC replace power supply Verify fuse If faulty replace fuse Stack temperature alarm Disconnected cable Verify cable connections If cable connections are valid swap thermcouple connector with a known good connector on the thermocouple board If error follows thermocouple rep
130. djust for the selected output channel Configuration choices include selecting range setting minimum maximum values and choosing the signal to output e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config All Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 FROST Ther Panes mar ii miie io Liimi Li ik i The Select Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V Possible ranges for the current outputs are 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Select Range Thermo Fisher Scientific Minimum and Maximum Thermo Fisher Scientific Value Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero 0 and full scale 100 values respectively in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 2 for a list of choices The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The following example shows the set minimum value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Set Minimum or Maximum Value Table 3 2 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale
131. e e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Source gt Min or Max EH DHOBM Neph Ref Det The Neph Source screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 2 40 to 2 60 VDC If the neph ref det reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Alarms Menu alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Ref Det e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Ref Det gt Min or Max DH vided ML Neph Span Source The Neph Span Source screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 100 mA If the neph span source reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Span Source DH pikor ML 3 86 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Span Source gt Min or Max o EH mata Neph Span Ref The Neph Span Ref screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm para
132. e 5 29 Vi N LS gt G mityvac 2 d D 3 cd e NN D E Sample Line to filter e W I xw Assembly Figure 5 29 Sample Line Connection to Heated Air Tube 11 To verify Sample Filter Assembly a Connect the red tubing to the sample line that was disconnected from the Heated Air tube Assembly and draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g O 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes b Ifvacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks on fittings and tubing See Figure 5 29 12 To verify the TEOM Mounting Assembly Heated Air Tube Filter Assembly Mass Transducer and the Normally Close side of the TEOM Bypass Valve a Disconnect the Heated Air Tube Assembly from the Nephelometer Assembly and cap off the end of the Air tube using a Blind VCO plug b Disconnect the Sample Line from the Y of the Heated Tube attach 1 4 tube Adapter and Nut to union fitting on the Heated Air Tube c Connect the red tubing to port adapter and draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g O 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes d If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks See Figure 5 30 Blind VCO P
133. e Flow Calibration 4 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to calibrate the bypass return mass flow controller Equipment Required Flow meter with a min max range of 0 5 50 slpm and accuracy of 2 of reading max Wrench 11 16 inch Note System must be operational for a minimum of 30 minutes before starting this procedure All flows entered must reference standard conditions i e 25 C 760 mmHg A 1 At the Probe Monitor remove the Bypass umbilical line and connect the flow meter to the umbilical line 2 From the Main Menu choose Service MFC Cal Pres Temp Set the pressure to 760 0 mmHg and the temperature to 25 0 C using the keypad and press to save Press Cm to return to the Service menu Note If Service is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 From the Service menu choose Bypass MFC Calibration gt 60 FS Observe flow meter and allow time for flow reading to stabilize When flow is stable enter the standard flow from the reference meter and press to save Press W to return to the Bypass MFC Cal menu 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the flow values in order from largest value to smallest 5 Remove the flow meter and reconnect the Bypass umbilical line to the Probe Monitor To calibrate the nephelometer purge flow place the instrument into Purge mode With the inlet to the nephelometer cap
134. e Rr dpc 8 10 Analog Current E 8 10 Analog Voltage lan puts c ne erede de neral cala etus 8 10 E Ee CN 8 11 Disita pudo ao cece Sia St dO im 8 11 er 8 11 R 232 ConnecHON ii 8 11 RS ABI COBDECHOH as 8 12 Ethernet ee 8 12 MV AER ANIL o E E Ra A 1 C Link Protocol Commands eere eere re rnn ternas B 1 Instrument Identification Number B 1 Coat nds a A is B 1 Commando Listas oa B 3 MODBUS Protocol iai ai C 1 Serial Communication Parameters s sscssssccssosssssescssscecssesecosseees C 1 TCP Communication Parameters esee C 2 Application Data Unit Defnitionos e ic C 2 ho ETc eb ER Pa io ooa ode sott pastus EE C 2 VE E EE C 2 Dunctionm Code lc ds C 3 Dita drid C 3 Error Checked eat t dude Phe esum MES ce Lua C 3 Function Codes siot teu a iio C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs adesto unde cobi C 3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Single Coil ica a C 7 MODBUS Parameters Supported smtp lides C 8 Reading a Write Colada dd ia C 13 Model 3880 Instruction Manual xv Contents xvi Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Model 3880 PM CEMS Flow SchematiC o o o o 1 4 Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material sss 2 2 Figure 2 2 Component Layout Open View of Monitor Assembly 2 3 F
135. e for the selected functional mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Blow Back Schedule gt Next Time EERE TRE Pit hti PEt F de Zoe La AP Period The Blow Back Period screen allows the user to set hour and minute for the selected functional mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Blow Back Schedule gt Period Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Eike ii i Mass Mode The Mass Mode Schedule menu allows the user to view the next scheduled Schedule time fora TEOM Mass mode as well as the period at which it occurs It also allows schedule and period to be selected to bring you to the next screen to modify these values Auto Update toggles ON OFF e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Mass Mode Schedule DH vibe ML PRA Next Time The Next Time screen is used to view and set the date hour and minute for the selected functional mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Mass Mode Schedule gt Next Time DH DENM Em Ex o Period The Mass Mode Period screen allows the user to set hour and minute for the selected functional mode 3 18 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Mass Mode Schedule gt Period Duration Duration allows t
136. eae ve aer riego se 3 8 Flow Eet deene geg Qt Ae 3 9 Neph TEOM Screen cripta pra 3 9 Main Meni agarra Serben EEN SEENEN EIERE 3 10 Ayeraging Lies ssa tis asia da a nl ere 3 10 Calibration PACLOLS EE 3 11 PM Wer Calibration Pacto a 3 11 PM Wet Calibration Equation qe te o E Re tds 3 11 Reset User Cal Dels aa 3 12 Instrument Controls Menta oer acis 3 12 Functional Modest do 3 13 KE sia adis Ls 3 13 Set Ke 3 14 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual vii Contents viii Model 3880 Instruction Manual SEE Kee 3 14 SELL LON Eira esti toa tia 3 14 SEEN dde 3 15 Seras d 3 15 KEE 3 15 Seb Bass e NA es ee 3 16 External E 3 16 Blow Bacls Schedule a 3 17 Next Linie eege daa 3 17 o ERIS NIME MER EET 3 17 Mass Mode Schedules ii nite dra asda da rent d Sa Du Re eese gq 3 18 INext Time i358 tei ba 3 18 System Check Schedule la oon ae o euntis 3 20 Next Lime ette Aid 3 20 Period usen outs oco S ode te ton coe e acr Rr 3 21 Reset TEOM Total Masa a 3 21 EE 3 21 Sample S Po ao Seen cana tie is Tua cabia Pata do tees certus dae 3 22 ee 3 22 Select See ABC ites la eege cadit 3 23 View Logged Data ss caian 3 23 Numberot Records 3 24 Data TEEN 3 24 Erase LO ANN PTT 3 25 Select Content vue edad acenda Tu rd do Sio Leaf da 3 25 Choose Field Dita aa cod ect eco ae pide o dts 3 26 EE 3 26 Other Measurement 3 26 Analog A NOR FAN USE RE AR 3 27 Other Measurements 2 3 28 Commit Content 3 28 Reset to Default Content ur sa
137. eaming Data Config Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Streaming Data Interval Select Stream Data Concentrations 3 36 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a new record will be generated The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Interval DH vibe ML Note Add Labels Prepend Timestamp and Add Flags are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected A The Select Stream Data screen displays a list of the types of data that can be sent via streaming data Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements Measurements 2 and Analog Outputs e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item 1 8 DERE RR ITI Li Fikrimi i Ji a d de Zoe dar ad The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Concentrations T
138. ear panel Figure 7 12 4 Pop the board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Figure 7 11 Replacing the O Expansion Board 7 28 Model 388017 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Motherboard Digital Output Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement 1 0 Expansion Board Digital Output Board Figure 7 12 Rear Panel Board Connectors Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 11 Equipment Required Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Disconnect the digital
139. eated block outlet The nephelometer measures the scattering of light in the presence of a particulate matter sample It includes a self zeroing and auto span feature and is heated to a constant temperature TEOM The TEOM is a tapered element oscillating microbalance and is positioned downstream of the nephelometer On a scheduled basis the sample is sent towards the TEOM through a heated sample tube The TEOM includes a filter for sample collection and this filter needs to be replaced periodically Pneumatic Controls On the top side of the probe monitor are a series of valves that control the blow back of pitot and stinger tubes the actuator to drive the ball valve and a three way valve that directs the sample flow to and away from the TEOM All valves are powered through umbilical connections Temperature Control A dedicated thermocouple circuit board is located on the top side of the probe monitor It permits the measurement of the stack source dilution stinger bypass and nephelometer temperatures Power Supply On the top side of the probe monitor is a power supply that provides the 24 VDC necessary to operate the thermocouple PCB nephelometer and TEOM Probe Controller The probe controller handles the communication to and from the probe monitor It manages the heated zones and pneumatic controls of the probe monitor It also manages all flow control for the entire system in addition to storing all data and managing all I O o
140. ed when power is applied to the PM CEMS This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are being performed Thermo IEN TI ioris Run Screens The Run screens display PM concentrations temperatures pressures flow and neph TEOM data The status bar displays the time 24 hour format the password lock icon service wrench icon alarm bell icon and optional zero span sample solenoid valve status if installed Status Bar Icons The password lock icon indicates that no parameter changes can be made from gt B O A lt The alarm bell icon indicates that an alarm is active the front panel t The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the service mode 3 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview The Concentration Run screen displays the current PM concentration Pressingl t Jand Y will scroll through the different Run screens Title Bar CONCEITOS TTMH PPE NEUE E A Lei EE osa Status Bar Icons GI Concentration Screen The Concentration Run screen displays PM concentrations Pressing and 4 will scroll through the different Run screens Title Bar Status Bar E Status Bar Icons Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Firmware Overview Temperatures Screen The Temperatures Run screen normally displays the current temper
141. een before calibrating A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Probe Calibration gt Static Pres Calibration gt Span DH pikari ML PEA Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Restore Default The Restore Default Calibration screen allows the user to reset the default Calibration values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Pres Probe Calibration Static Pres Calibration Set Defaults MFC Calibration The MFC Calibration Pressure Temperature screen allows the user to view Pressure Temperature and set the mass flow controller calibrations for temperature and pressure The MFC calibration pressure temperature submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service MFC Cal Pres Temp EN iai Piim Pit Sample MFC The Sample MFC Calibration screen allows the user to calibrate the sample Calibration mass flow controller at set SLPM points The sample MFC calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 99 Operation Service Menu Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technicia
142. efer to Table 6 5 Probe controller temperature alarm Faulty thermistor Missing thermistor Replace thermistor Install thermistor Barometric pressure alarm Static pressure alarm Pitot pressure alarm Barometric pressure sensor out of calibration Faulty barometric pressure Clogged Pitot line s Static pressure sensor out of calibration Static pressure sensor faulty Clogged pitot line s Pitot pressure sensor out of calibration Pitot pressure sensor faulty Calibrate the barometric pressure sensor Replace the TEOM board Perform a system blow back Perform a static pressure sensor calibration Replace the pressure board Perform a system blow back Perform a pitot pressure sensor calibration Replace the pressure board Sample check alarm 6 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual No power to sample or bypass pump MFC flow out of tolerance Faulty sample mems sensor Verify pumps are turned on and power is being applied Ensure fuses on SSR board are not blown Audit calibrate sample dilution and bypass MFCs Audit sample flow If actual and sample flow reading OK but Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Faulty sample MFC Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action sample check is not replace mems sensor If actual flow sample and sample audit flow match but out of spec setpoint replace sample
143. el to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting 5 Press Cm gt Cm to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 6 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels Equipment Required DC voltage source greater than O volts and less than 10 volts 1 Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 10 shows the analog input pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press e 4 Press Jto scroll to Calibrate Full scale and press 2 The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 5 Use J Jand t to enter the source voltage and press 4 Jto calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel connected to the source voltage 6 Dress W Jto return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Thermo Fisher Scientific I O Expansion Board Replacement Thermo Fishe
144. em components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined Suggested maintenance frequencies are maximum limits and depending on conditions may have to be performed more frequently This chapter includes the following maintenance information and replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Preventive Maintenance Schedule on page 5 2 e Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 3 e HEPA Filter Replacement on page 5 4 e TEOM Filter Replacement on page 5 5 e Sample Pump Rebuild on page 5 9 e O Ring Replacement on page 5 11 e Bypass Pump Rebuild on page 5 14 e Sample Line Brush Down on page 5 17 e TEOM Transducer Service on page 5 20 e Nephelometer Service on page 5 20 e Heated Block Service on page 5 20 e Nozzle and Dilution Module Cleaning on page 5 20 e Leak Check on page 5 22 e Service Locations on page 5 39 Read the following safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Schedule WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representative If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static e
145. ement values The one second accumulated counts are accumulated for the user specified averaging time In continuous mode if this averaging time is greater than five seconds the measurement is updated every 10 seconds In switching mode the measurement is updated every 60 seconds The one second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor The calculation begins by subtracting the appropriate electronic offset from the count accumulation Following this correction the raw accumulated counts are scaled according to the gain setting of the input board Next the uncorrected values are determined according to a unique averaging algorithm which minimizes errors resulting from rapidly changing gas concentrations This algorithm results in values which are stored in RAM in a circular buffer that holds all the data This data is averaged over the selected time interval which can be in switching mode any multiple of sixty between 60 and 300 the continuous modes have additional intervals of 1 2 5 10 20 30 and 90 seconds Note In switching mode the averaging times are 60 120 180 240 and 300 seconds A The background values which are corrected for temperature are subtracted from their respective averages The reading is corrected by the stored span factor and by the temperature factor The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and
146. emperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Stinger e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Stinger Temperature gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Alarms Menu Bypass Temperature The Bypass Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 95 to 105 C If the bypass temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Bypass e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Bypass gt Min or Max Neph Block Temperature The Neph Block Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 55 to 65 C If the nephelometer block temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Temperatures Neph Block 3 74 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e
147. en and closes to trigger the digital output action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed 3 42 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is assigned to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types of either alarms or non alarm to choose from e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State Alarms The Alarms screen allows the user to select an alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH vided ML MA Alarms2 The Alarms 2 screen allows the user to select an alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms 3 44 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Con
148. er to the channel to be tested Figure 7 10 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels vo EXPANSION E 4 Current Outputs Analog Voltage Inputs Analog Voltage Outputs 1 E S Figure 7 10 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 2 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs screen appears 3 Press amp Jto scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press The Set Analog Outputs screen appears 4 Press to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 6 Press to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing Analog Output Calibration 7 Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 8 Press to reset the analog outputs to normal Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections
149. ers Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Diagnostics Menu System Checks Current System Checks Analog Input Readings 3 64 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The System Checks screen displays current scales analog readings In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt System Checks CO ouod Pil PEL EEE i The Current System Checks screen displays the results for the latest daily system checks In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt System Checks gt Current or Current 1 6 PME la EE The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 user scaled analog readings In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Readings Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu une A Analog Input The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog Voltages voltage readings e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Analog Input Voltages Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs Pull ups are provided on all of the inputs so if nothing they will read 1 if an input is brought to ground it will read 0 e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Digital Inputs o EH mata Relay States The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their origina
150. ervice technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Calibrate Zero Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu y EH DHOBM EH DHOBM LP The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog input In the Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal select Channel Calibrate Zero The Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog input In the Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal select Channel Calibrate Full Scale Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 109 Operation Service Menu Display Pixel Test The Display Pixel Test screen is used to test the LCD display by toggling between all pixels on and all pixels off to ensure that they are functioning properly The display pixel test screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test Restore User Defaults The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible onl
151. et a aede ni dada 5 7 Sample Pump Rebuild voii 5 9 O Ring Replacement asas dro e ea 5 11 Bypass Pump Rebuild AAA AR pde oca 5 14 Sample Line Brush Down E 5 17 TEOM Transducer Service eege 5 20 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Nephelometer Semace ii ias died asa 5 20 Heated RE 5 20 Nozzle and Dilution Module Cleaning iet is 5 20 Leak Check C 5 22 Servico Lociones 5 39 Trouble ad 6 1 Safety Precatti ns ee Eege 6 1 Troubleshooting ide iS 6 1 Boatd Level Connection Diaria 6 10 Connector Pin Descriptions esses lectus ios 6 11 PM CEMS Board Diagrams iiec bite iii 6 32 Service LOCAS eben EA heen 6 38 A annene 1 1 Safety Precautions anoto ao aca 7 3 Firmware Updates eite acte ad naipe anda ias 7 4 Replacement EE 7 4 Cable its ORA Da a 7 6 External Device Connection Components ouo rs 7 7 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel A ana aai i 7 11 Accessing E 7 13 Fuse Replacement vacuna ici 7 13 External Pump Replacements sena Ehi 7 13 Fan Replacements 5 cac EE 7 13 ERT E 7 15 Mass Flow Sample Assembly Replacement 7 16 Bypass Return Mass Flow Assembly Replacement 7 16 Dilution Control Assembly Replacement ess 7 17 Pressure Board Replacement aa denon ibi aa 7 18 Mems Sensor Replacement pia 7 19 SOR Board Replacement ethene e etr 7 20 Pitot Valve Replacement aote etd ob
152. f Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to make a selection e Dress W to return to the Main Menu or _ _ to return to the Run screen Ave raging Time The Averaging Times screen allows the user to view current and choose averaging time in seconds The following averaging times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 600 and 900 e Inthe Main Menu choose Averaging Time 3 10 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Factors Calibration Factors The Calibration Factors screen allows the user to view current settings and choose the calibration curve type Linear Polynomial Logarithmic Exponential Power or None and calibration factors for PM wet concentration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors PM Wet Calibration The PM Wet Calibration Factors screen allows the user to view current Factors settings and choose the calibration factors for the PM wet concentration The factors use the same nomenclature as prescribed within the US EPA PS 11 document e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt current concentration calibration PM Wet Calibration The PM Wet Calibration Equation screen allows the user to view current Equation settings and choose the calibration curve type Linear Polynomial Logarithmic Exponential Power or None for the PM wet concentration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt
153. f checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen normally displays the current PM concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions sample conditions and mass sensor data From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview submenu contains related instrument settings This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information Power up Screen elt Test Screen Run Screens Main M Averaging Time Calibration Factors Instrument Controls Diagnostics PM Wet PM Wet Values PM Wet Curve Restore User Defaults Functional Mode Monitor Mass Purge Blowback Manual Nephelometer Zero Single Span Sys Check Multi Span Sys Check Purge Zero Check Purge Span 1 4 Valve Power Actuator Blowback Dilution Air Pitot Blowback TEOM Bypass Sample Pump Relay Bypass Pump Relay PI PD PS Set Temperatures Dilution Stinger Bypass Nephelometer Block TEOM Air Tube TEOM Case Failsafe Set Flows Dilution Set Flow Bypass Set Flow Sample Set Flow Set Failsafes on off Velocity Settings CO2 CO 02 N2 H20 External Velocity Blow Back Schedule Next Time Period Mass Mode Schedule Next Time Period Duration Stabilize Collect Integration
154. f leak is internal to the Nephelometer this must be service by a qualified Thermo Technician If No leak is found then go to the next step 9 Check Purge Air Filter Assembly fittings and tubing Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 29 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check 5 30 Model 38801 Instruction Manual a Connect the red silicone tubing from the hand vacuum pump to the 4 inch tubing of the filter assembly and draw vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If no leak is found then go to the next step after removing sealing plug from the Nephelometer assembly and reinserting the Purge Air tube into the Nephelometer 10 Remove the Leak Test Fitting from the Nephelometer Outlet and reattach the Heated Air tube Assembly Take care to keep the Heated Air Tube Assembly aligned with the TEOM Mounting Assembly a Sample Line Fitting Disconnect the Sample Line from the Y of the Heated Tube attach 1 4 tube Adapter and Nut to union fitting on the Heated Air Tube Connect the red tubing to port adapter and draw the vacuum back to 6 inHg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks continue to the next step See Figur
155. f the nephelometer Then gain access to the o ring on the nephelometer outlet o ring p lt D O A P a Air Tube f Rings TA E TEOM Sample Lee Inlet O Rina MM I j 7 ees ER o TEOM Mounting Cap O Ring TEOM Figure 5 15 TEOM Mounting Assembly Cutaway 7 10 It is recommended to remove the TEOM Mounting Assembly from the Probe Monitor using a 3 8 inch wrench There are several small parts and the possibility of causing damage to the assembly Disconnect the two seven pin cable connection and the two filter assemblies Note the orientation for re installation Remove the TEOM Mass Transducer from the Mounting Assembly Note the orientation of the release handle and the position of the TEOM Mounting Cap This will assist you later in re assembly Use tweezers to remove the o rings from the Heated Air Tube Assembly When re installing the two o rings on the Heated Air Tube Assembly take care not to damage the new o rings while installing Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the o rings before installation Figure 5 15 To replace the TEOM Sample Inlet o ring remove the retaining E Clip by prying it back using a flat headed screwdriver and then remove locking nut Lift handle and Mounting Cap with the Sample Inlet will drop out Note the orientation of both the handle and the mounting cap Figure 5 16 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 13 Preventive Maintenance Bypass P
156. f the system The probe controller is the main interface to the 3880 PM CEMS Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880i Instruction Manual 8 3 System Description Hardware SSR Board Mass Flow Pressure Board Ze Ai AOF Ean AC Distribution Board Thermocouple MIB Board 146i Connection Board Figure 8 2 Probe Controller Components 8 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Dilution MFC Bypass MFC Sample MFC Bypass Pump Sample Pump Pneumatic Umbilical Electrical Umbilicals Firmware Instrument Control Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Firmware The diluction mass flow controller MFC is used to measure and control the dilution air through the dilution nozzle assembly The bypass mass flow controller MFC is used to measure and control the diluted sample flow through the stinger and heated block The sample mass flow controller MFC is used to measure and control the gas flow through the nephelometer and TEOM The external bypass pump is used to draw the bypass flow through the instrument The internal sample pump is used to draw the sample flow through the nephelometer and TEOM The pneumatic umbilical delivers the dilution air to the dilution nozzle assembly and transports the sample and bypass flows to the probe controller The electrical umbilicals are paired to power the probe monitor and handle communications via RS 485 The processor firmware ta
157. g space constraints at the point of installation Refer to Mantle Removal on page 7 50 in the Servicing section for removal and connecting mantle to probe monitor When installing always make connectors to the Probe Controller first N WARNING The Model 3880 is supplied with a three wire grounding cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A 2 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Probe Monitor Preparation Push Connect Fittings CDA Clean Dry Air Figure 2 3 Model 3880 Rear Panel Probe Monitor Us the following procedure to prepare the probe monitor Preparation N WARNING The Model 3880 is supplied with a three wire grounding cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A 1 On bench on floor place probe monitor with support block under the mantle Figure 2 4 Support Block Figure 2 4 Probe Monitor with Support Block 2 Remove the six hex screws from the mantle shroud Save screws for reinstallation Figure 2 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 388017 Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Probe Monitor Preparation Figure 2 5 Probe Mantle Shroud 3 If Pitot option ordered remove 3 protective caps on Pitot fittings Add silver goop to threads of Pitot fittings before installing Pitot tube assembly Figure 2 6 Add Silver Goop to Fitting Threads Pitot Tube Assembly
158. ge in to apply pressure to obtain 50 mmHg Once stable enter the manometer reading into the Set To value and using the keypad and press to save Press twice to return to the Pres Probe Calibration menu e Reconnect the tube to Port 6 From the Pres Probe Calibration menu choose Pitot Pres On the rear panel of the Probe Controller Sensors remove 1 8 inch tubing from ports 4 and 5 and leave open to atmosphere From the Pitot Pres Cal menu choose Zero to zero the Pitot sensor Press to calibrate the zero value Press Cm to return to the Pitot Pres Cal menu From the Pitot Pres Cal menu choose Span Set span for the Pitot Pres targeting 8 5 mmHg Refer to Figure 4 1 a Connect 1 8 inch tubing into port 44 from one side of the 1 8 inch T fitting b Zero manometer before connecting the other end of the 1 8 inch tubing from the 1 8 inch T Fitting then connect to the positive side of the manometer e g Dwyer 477 1 series c Using a 10 cc Syringe draw the syringe back before connecting to the last port on the 1 8 inch T Fitting d SLOWLY push the syringe in to apply pressure to obtain 8 5 mmHg once stable Enter the manometer reading into the Set To value and using the keypad and press to save Press twice to return to the Pres Probe Calibration menu e Reconnect the respective tubes to ports 4 and 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Pressure Sensors 6 From the Pres Probe Calibrati
159. ges between 0 and 10096 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both types of records and changing the percent allocated to one record type will automatically change the other e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Configure Datalogging Memory Allocation 96 EH DHOBMI Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record type whether the data should be averaged over the interval the 3 30 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data treatment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurement All other data points log the current value at the end of the interval Note This feature is found in all Series instruments but it is recommended that the data type be set to ONLY the current value cur as the datalogging averaging is done in addition to the normal concentration averaging A e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Data Treatment EH DHOBMI Flag Status Data The Flag Status Data screen is used to set the flag status data to either ON or OFF for the selected record type e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Da
160. gh the center of the partition panel 6 Remove two screws from the left side rear of the case viewed from the front 7 Remove one screw from the bottom rear of the case 8 Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel 9 While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement case assembly and pull the measurement case assembly from the rear of the case 10 Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel that secures the top of the panel to the measurement case assembly and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables 11 Replace the measurement case assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Accessing the Service Mode Fuse Replacement External Pump Replacement Fan Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Accessing the Service Mode If the Service menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode The Service Mode screen appears 2 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON 3 Dress W W Jto return to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Use the following procedure to replace the fuse Equipment Required Replacement fuses refer to the Model 3880i Replacement Parts on page 7 4 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the fuse dr
161. guration gt Digital Input Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument Action 3 46 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Configuration Select Channel Allow Over Under Range Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu o EH mata The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels individual voltage channels 1 6 and individual current channels 1 6 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config EH DHOBM The Allow Over Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V 0 mA or 4 mA By default this parameter is set to on and 596 over and under range is allowed for all analog output channels e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Output Config Allow Over Under Range Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Output Configuration Select Action Select Range 3 48 Model 3880 Instruction Manual iE Aiii ii 2o piri The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output configuration choices from which the user selects the parameter to a
162. gure 7 8 Refer to Figure 7 31 for plumbing connections and Figure 7 34 for Replacement electrical connections To rebuild the pump see Sample Pump Rebuild on page 5 9 Equipment Required Replacement Pump Wrench 9 16 inch Phillips screwdriver f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the top cover 2 Disconnect the pump power line from SSR board pump Captive Screws 4 4 H Pump Ground Strap dg Es UE Figure 7 8 Replacing the Internal Pump 3 Remove the plumbing from the inlet and outlet of the pump 4 Loosen the four captive screws on the pump mounting plate Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing Mass Flow Sample Assembly Replacement Mass Flow Sample Assembly Replacement A Bypass Return Mass Flow Assembly Replacement 7 16 Model 38801 Instruction Manual 5 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the 0 5 LPM mass flow sample assembly Figure 7 3 Refer to Figure 7 31 for plumbing
163. h ground A It s important to read all the following steps before replacing the filter A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A WEEE Symbol The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol E Model 3880 Instruction Manual Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 A Thermo Fisher Scientific Where to Get Help Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual Where to Get Help Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermoscientific com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International We continue to support our customers with advanced online resources Our Air Q
164. handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 10 11 Turn off pump power switch unplug the pump power cord Disconnect the inlet and outlet lines With a T 25 Torx driver remove the eight head screws Remove pump head and make not of the orientation for reassembly purposes Remove the two valve plate assemblies Again not the orientation for the reinstallation of the new assemblies Remove the two cylinder sleeves and loosen the retainer hold down screw and remove the piston cup Inpect the connecting rod assemblies for damage and clean any reused parts as needed Install new piston cups and tighten down with new retainer hold down screws Slip the cylinder sleeves over the piston cups and ensure they are centered in the pump chassis Install new valve plate assemblies and cylinder o rings Ensure o rings are centered on the cylinder sleeves and notches in the bottom of the valve plate assemblies Ensure new valve plate head gaskets are properly seated and reinstall pump head Install and tighten the eight pump head screws Reconnect inlet and outlet lines Plug in power cord and turn on pump power switch Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 15 Preventive Maintenance Bypass Pump Rebuild 12 After allowing at least 30 minutes for t
165. hassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Sample Control Valve Replacement 2 Remove the top cover of the probe monitor to access internal components CAUTION When removing the top cover remove the three screws at the front of the cover before loosening or removing screws at the bulkhead A 3 Remove the side doors of the probe monitor to access internal components 4 Remove the three plumbing lines 5 Remove the power connector 6 From under side of the assembly remove the two Phillips head mounting screws 7 Install the new sample control valve assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Screws 2 Power Connector Sample Control Valve Figure 7 21 Replacing the Sample Control Valve Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 43 Servicing DC Power Supply Monitor Replacement DC Power Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply assembly Supply Monitor Equipment Required Replacement DC power supply assembly Phillips screwdriver 1 and 2 Nut driver 1 4 inch amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be T Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small worn while handling any internal component
166. he 3 8 inch house clean dry air to the rear panel port labeled CDA This port has a T fitting already mounted to the rear panel The pressure input should be 80 100 psi 80 slpm 3 From the umbilical connect the 3 8 inch tube labeled DIL1 to the rear panel port labeled DIL1 4 From the umbilical connect the 3 8 inch tube labeled DIL2 to the rear panel port labeled DIL2 5 From the umbilical side labeled to probe cntrl connect the 3 8 inch tube labeled BYPASS to the rear panel port labeled BYPASS IN 6 From the umbilical connect the 1 4 inch tube labeled SAMPLE IN to the sample relief valve assembly rear panel port labeled SAMPLE IN 7 From the umbilical connect a spare 1 4 inch tube labeled SAMPLE OUT and vent to atmosphere outside of CEMS shelter 8 Using Figure 2 4 connect the labeled 1 8 inch tubes into the push to connect fitting This fitting is keyed and can now be connected to the rear panel 2 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Probe Controller Figure 2 9 Push Connect Fitting 10 11 12 13 14 With tubing assembly BYPASS OUT RETURN to pump intake of 3 8 inch tubing connect the rear panel port labeled BYPASS OUT RETURN to the intake port of the 220 VAC vacuum pump provided From the umbilical connect the 3 8 inch tube labeled RETURN to the outlet of vacuum pump Connect the keyed electrical umbili
167. he Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Pitot gt Min or Max CO priori ML r EA TEOM DP Pressure The TEOM DP Pressure screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 125 mmHg If the TEOM DP pressure reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt TEOM DP CO gules ML e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt TEOM DP gt Min or Max 3 80 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Flows The Flows submenu allows the user to view and set the selected flow alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows EH DHOB Nozzle Flow The Nozzle Flow screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 1 to 5 SLPM If the nozzle flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Flows Nozzle e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Flow Nozzle Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Alarms Menu PME la EE Dilution Flow Bypass The Dilution Flow scree
168. he Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Alarms Menu Stack Temperature The Stack Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 25 to 225 C If the stack temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Stack DH Guided ML PRA e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Stack gt Min or Max Dilution Temperature The Dilution Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 100 to 200 C If the dilution temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Dilution 3 72 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu thi KR e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Temperatures gt Dilution gt Min or Max Stinger Temperature The Stinger Temperature screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 95 to 125 C If the stinger t
169. he flow meter and reconnect the Sample umbilical line to the Probe Monitor Use the following procedure to calibrate the dilution mass flow controller Equipment Required Flow meter with a min max range of 0 5 50 slpm and accuracy of 2 of reading max Wrench 11 16 inch Note System must be operational for a minimum of 30 minutes before starting this procedure All flows entered must reference standard conditions De 25 C 760 mmHg A 1 At the Probe Monitor remove the Dilution 1 umbilical line and connect the flow meter to the umbilical line 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt MFC Cal Pres Temp Set the pressure to 760 0 mmHg and the temperature to 25 0 C using the keypad and press to save Press Cm to return to the Service menu Note If Service is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 From the Service menu choose Dilution MEC Calibration gt 60 FS Observe flow meter and allow time for flow reading to stabilize When flow is stable enter the standard flow from the reference meter and press to save Press Cm to return to the Dilution MFC Cal menu 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the flow values in order from largest value to smallest 5 Remove the flow meter and reconnect the Dilution 1 umbilical line to the Probe Monitor Model 3880 Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Bypass MFC Bypass MFC Nephelometer Purg
170. he pump to warm up and stabilize perform a bypass MFC calibration to confirm proper operation of the bypass pump 1 ConnecingRodAssembly e Ee Figure 5 17 Rebuilding the Bypass Pump 5 16 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Sample Line Brush Down Sample Line Use the following procedure to brush down the probe monitor sample line Brush Down Thermo Fisher Scientific A Equipment Required Open end wrench 1 2 inch 3 8 inch 9 16 inch and 11 16 inch 2 Adjustable wrench 2 inch Phillips screwdriver stubby 2 Allen wrench 5 64 inch and 5 32 inch Nylon brush 1 2 inch diameter with at least a 3 foor extension Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the probe controller power cord 2 Remove the Probe Monitor from the stack While the monitor is removed insure the probe mantle is properly supported to prevent damage to the monitor chassis do to the weight of the mantle Remove the rear and two side covers 3 Remove the TE transducer 4 At the TEOM tube remove the 1 4
171. he reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes e Ifvacuum reading drops troubleshoot internal plumbing and fittings for leaks Figure 5 22 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 23 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check 5 24 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Sample Out Figure 5 22 Sample In 4 Dilution Air Line 1 a Atthe PROBE CONTROLER cap off the ZERO AIR port and DIL 2 with a 3 8 swagelok cap b Place a 3 8 port adapter and 3 8 nut on to DIL 1 Connect the hand vacuum pump using the red silicone tube set the hand pump to VACUUM and draw 25 inHg on the vacuum gauge Wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes c Ifvacuum reading drops troubleshoot for internal Dilution plumbing and fitting for leaks 5 Dilution Air Line 1 a Swap the 3 8 cap to DILI and the 3 8 port adapter with nut to DIL 2 and repeat the steps If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for internal Dilution plumbing and fittings leaks See Figure 5 25 6 Bypass Air Line a At the PROBE CONTROLER cap off the BYPASS RETURN port with a 3 8 swagelok cap b Place a 3 8 port adapter and 3 8 nut on to the BYPASS Connect the hand vacuum pump using the red silicone tube set the hand pump to VACUUM and draw 25 in Hg on
172. he user to set stabilization and collection for the selected functional mode Stabilization The Mass Mode Stabilization screen allows the user to set minute stabilization for the selected functional mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Mass Mode Schedule Stabilization EH mai Collection The Mass Mode Collection screen allows the user to set hour and minute period for the selected functional mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Mass Mode Schedule Collect Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Integration The Mass Mode Integration screen allows the user to set minute integration for the selected functional mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Mass Mode Schedule gt Integration System Check The System Check Schedule menu allows the user to view the next Schedule scheduled time for a daily system check as well as the period at which it occurs It also allows schedule and period to be selected to bring you to the next screen to modify these values e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Sys Check Schedule NextTime The Next Time screen is used to view and set the date hour and minute for the selected system check e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Sys Check Schedule gt Next Time 3 20 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scien
173. hermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Other Measurements 2 Analog Inputs 3 38 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The Other Measurements 2 screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected record field The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Other Measurements 2 The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog input 1 8 to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item
174. hillips screwdriver 2 Nut driver 3 8 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Heated Bench Replacement 1 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the top cover of the probe monitor to access internal components front of the cover before loosening or removing screws at the bulkhead A T CAUTION When removing the top cover remove the three screws at the 3 Remove the side doors of the probe monitor to access internal components Thermocouple 3 8 inch Nut Inlet Fitting Outlet Fitting 3 8 inch Nut Thermocouple Figure 7 16 Heated Bench Upside Down View Soc Cap Screws 2 Actuator Shaft Figure 7 17 Heated Bench Removed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Valve Manifold Replacement Valve Manifold Replacement 7 38 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 4 Loosen the inlet and outlet connections 5 Disconnect the three 3 8 inch pneumatic fittings 6 Unplug the heater connector 7 Unplug the thermocouple connector 8 Remove the four 3 8
175. ified volume flow All Dilution MFC set screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Dilution MFC Calibration gt 30 DERBI FPE The Bypass MFC Calibration screen allows the user to calibrate the bypass mass flow controller at set SLPM points The bypass MFC calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Bypass MFC Calibration Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 101 Operation Service Menu Set Bypass MFC Calibration Nephelometer Purge Flow Nephelometer Calibration 3 102 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The Set Bypass MFC calibration point screen allows the user to view and set the selected point for bypass mass flow controller calibration of volume flow It also displays the standard flow computed from the specified volume flow All Bypass MFC set screens function the same way e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Bypass MFC Calibration gt 30 CO ouod ML PA The Nephelometer Purge Flow screen allows the user to calibrate the nephelometer as well as perform other actions like mode selection and restore background settings to previous values The nephelometer purge flow submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For mo
176. ify instrument mode monitor sample or mass Flow alarm Flow error Verify all flows in Diagnostics All Bypass or sample pump in OFF position Bypass pump OFF Bypass sample pump relay is ON but not running Blown fuse on SSR board Sample pump running Damaged or dislodged no vacuum diaphragm flow are equal to set points Verify bypass sample pump is ON From Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Valve Power gt Sample Pump Relay or Bypass pump relay ON Verify on bypass pump external switch position is ON Verify bypass pump power cord is plugged into instrument and pump Verify fuses on SSR board are not blown Turn power off unplug load from SSR board Replace fuse s Turn instrument on with load still disconnected Verify fuse s does not blow Turn instrument off and connect load turn instrument on and verify function If fuse s blow again without load replace SSR board Place intrument into Purge mode wait 30 minutes to cool heaters Turn instrument off Remove the four screws and inspect diaphragm If not damaged reset If damaged replace pump or use rebuild kit to repair Bypass pump low or Aged pump eratic flow Need to re calibrate bypass MFC Replace pump or use rebuild kit to repair Refer to Calibration chapter Sample pump will not Disconnected cable turn on 6 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Place instrument in Purge mode set stinger dilution and pypa
177. ight a Inge the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions The soft keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function The function of the soft keys is to provide a shortcut to the most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and user defined labels in the lower part of the display indicate the function of each key at that time To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assigned soft keys A Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Firmware Overview Alphanumeric Entry Screen Entry Line Keyboard gt Firmware Overview 3 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual TEXTS MENA Bat A Zoe Programmable Soft Key Labels The alphanumeric entry screen
178. ign one of the concentrations to the selected record field The currently selected item is shown by after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Concentrations pines EE luas ORE Cd Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected record field The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by 3 26 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu the options installed Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Other Measurements Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the parameter none or analog input 1 8 to the selected field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes
179. igure 2 3 Model 3880 Rear Panel 2 5 Figure 2 4 Probe Monitor with Support Block 2 5 Figure 2 5 Probe Mantle Shroud ax sas ll EE al ey con 2 6 Figure 2 6 Pitot Tube Assembly 2 6 Figure 2 7 Dilution Aesembhy teens 2 7 Figure 2 8 Nozzle Aesembhy sss 2 7 Figure 2 9 Push Connect Fittings eo a 2 9 Figure 2 10 System Plumbing e 2 10 Figure 2 11 System Plumbing Lia decos 2 11 Figure 2 12 New View of Mantle and Montre 2 12 Figure 2 13 Upper View Probe Monitor Rear 2 14 Figure 2 14 Lower View of Probe Monitor Connections Rear 2 14 Figure 2 15 TEOM Mounting ic c ea 2 15 Figure 2 16 Mantle with Universal Mounting Hange 2 17 Figure 2 17 Mantle Mount 2 17 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display EE 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbutonzs ereto 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware sss 3 5 Figure 4 1 Nephelometer Calibration Diagram sss 4 3 Figure 4 2 TEOM Calibration Diagram eee 4 4 Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters cece 5 3 Figure 5 2 Replacing the TEOM ber 5 6 Figure 5 3 Filter Tool 5 6 Figure 5 4 Removing the TEOM Filter with the Filter Too 5 6 Figure 5 5 Removing the TE Filter sss 5 7 Figure 5 6 Filter Tool with Clean Filter 5 7 Figure 5 7 Empty Mass Transducer with Filter Change Notch 5 8 Figure 5 8 Placing the Filter on the Poust 5 8 Fig
180. ilution ratio din Reports sets digital input channel and active state do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per channel en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions erec format measurements and status in the specified format Reports sets erec format ASCII or binary erec layout Reports current layout of erec data flags Reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the status of the ozonator PMT gas mode and alarms flow dilution Reports current measured dilution flow flow sample Reports current measured sample flow format Reports sets current reply termination format func mode Reports sets current functional mode of the system he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton instr name Reports instrument name instrument id Reports sets instrument id internal temp Reports current internal instrument temperature isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display KO Reports KO factor of the TEOM transducer layout ack Disables stale layout layout changed indicator Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands
181. ion Panel REMOVE SCREWS Pass Through Connectors Loosen Captive Partition Panel Screw Remove Screw Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel The measurement case assembly can be removed and the partition panel can be lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Figure 7 6 SLIDE CASE ASSEMBLY OUT Figure 7 6 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel 7 12 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 3 Remove the cover 4 Disconnect the plumbing connections at the rear of the measurement case assembly 5 Disconnect the connectors that pass throu
182. iption span src 4 Reports sets individual span source level on span source 4 sr Reports last short record stored Srec Reports maximum number of short records srec format Reports sets output format for short records ASCII or binary srec layout srec mem size Reports current layout of short record data Reports maximum number of short records srec per Reports sets short record logging period stream per Reports sets current set time interval for streaming data stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not sys check udc Reports the last forward span drift values for all four span levels sys check Reports results of last system check target flow dilution Reports sets current set point for dilution flow target flow sample Reports sets current set point for sample flow target temp bypass Reports sets current target set to bypass temperature target temp neph block Reports sets current target set to NEPH block temperature target temp stinger Reports sets current target set to stinger temperature target temp teom tube temp bypass temp dilution Reports sets current target set to TEOM tube temperature Reports sets current bypass temperature Reports sets current dilution temperature temp neph block Reports current NEPH block temperature temp stinger Reports current stinger temperatu
183. iptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to INI to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Descriptor EH DHDBM The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Input Config select Channel Units The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal point from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Decimal Places PRS TRE ii miie io Liimi Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the analog input conversion table for the selected channel The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input voltage Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding reading value Only
184. is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Analog Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EH iai TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are required for Ethernet communications Note T he instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings Qu HED Eel Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DHCP EN DHOBM E EM a i Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 40 IP Address Netmask Default Gateway Model 3880 Instruction Manual The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above
185. is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type only not both srecs and lrecs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Erase Log Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use to configure the data to be logged When a field is selected a submenu list appears of the items to choose from to assign to those fields Item types are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs These record fields comprise a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data for the selected record type only as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Choose Field Data The Choose Field Data submenu displays a list of the types of data that can be logged for the current field Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs and Other Measurements 2 e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 DEDUCT TREEDT pyg CH DEM Ji dia d e Zoe fat A M Pd Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to ass
186. isher Scientific Sample filter has collected too much sample no mass transducer installed Replace filter and reset TEOM total mass From Main Menu gt Instrument Controls Install mass transducer with new sample filter Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Malfunction Possible Cause Action Faulty pressure sensor Replace TEOM mounting assembly board Disconnected pressure sensor Verify pressure sensor plumbing plumbing lines lines are connected Negative Dp pressure Pressure sensor plumbing Verify pressure sensor plumbing alarm lines are backward plumbed lines are plumbed correctly Board Level Figure 6 1 is a board level connection diagram These illustrations can be Connection Diagrams used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 7 through Table 6 9 to troubleshoot board level faults PM CEMS SYSTEM His Mit so Presa lose 10244200 L ta eb e E d 11150620 amp 111907 00 7 ME to SSR Deve Bd s Kap 30 MESSI to Hime RS485 4 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram nasio Fam TC WA somo e e o eee ee pm pr LFP 6 10 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Pin The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 7 through Table 6 16 can be Descriptions level faults used along with the board level connection diagram to t
187. istatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the probe controller cover 2 Loosen the fittings and remove both lines going to the pump 3 Loosen the four screws holding the pump plate to the flow of the instrument Unplug the pump power connector and remove the pump assembly from the instrument 4 Remove the four screws from the compressor housing cover and remove the cover 5 Remove the four screws and from the top plate remove top plate flapper valve and bottom plate 6 Turn the fan until the diaphragm is positioned at the top and centered Unscrew the old diaphragm by turning it counterclockwise and remove from the assembly Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 9 Preventive Maintenance Sample Pump Rebuild 7 Carefully screw the new diaphragm into the connecting rod Spin the diaphragm on until it is snug Note DO NOT use tools A 8 Turn the fan until the diaphragm is flat across With the diaphragm centered over the compressor housing firmly seat the diaphragm edge into the compressor housing groove 9 Replace the bottom plate onto the compressor housing the new flapper valve on top of the intermediate plate and the top plate on t
188. l 3880 Instruction Manual 7 55 Servicing Dilution Thermocouple Removal Dilution Use the following procedure to remove the dilution thermocouple assembly Figure 7 29 Thermocouple Removal 7 56 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Equipment Required Replacement dilution supply assembly Open end wrench 5 16 inch 7 16 inch and 1 inch Adjustable wrench Allen wrench 5 32 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Silver goop thread lubricant Stiff bristle nylon brush Pick or awl Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A l At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord At the Probe Monitor remove the monitor from the stack by removing the stack flange bolts then gently slide the Probe Monitor out of the stack taking caution not to damage the nozzle or stack thermocouple mounted on the end of the mantle Place Monitor on a flat work surface and support the Mantle assemble to prevent damage to the Monitor chassis Allow time for the mantle to cool before starting disassembly Disconnect the two Monitor side covers Disconnect the Dilution and Stack thermocouple conne
189. l 3880 Instruction Manual 7 63 Servicing System Drawings NI 60 0CLOSI ASSV 318v O aNd NIVW ASSY 318v 2 HM SIATYA e S3ATVA LOY SIATVA tov CUY OS uss 6 peat egg ASA HES 105 2v Jg V ay ha E E RA DO Co na RA E TN aocora 0000000 MARE E Hass Doe Dos Doc Dos Dos De E Gg eis EE qA Do x IN EE CH Nona CUTE Il Jia e 4H l H e ma S HM a3 o B Si Ts 6 5 ILI o 9 dwnd o mq EE E qr ei IS la 5 Si E ost LOU
190. l states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Relay States Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Diagnostics Menu e Press to toggle and set the relay state to open or closed for the selected digital output DH pikari MALA Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to O volts and reset returns the output to normal operation The analog outputs are returned to normal operation upon exiting this screen The following example shows the screen when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 3 66 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Instrument The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the Configuration hardware configuration on the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration
191. lace thermocouple Otherwise replace thermocouple board assembly Dilution temperature alarm Disconnected cable Verify cable connections If cable connections are valid swap thermcouple connector with a known good connector on the thermocouple board If error follows thermocouple replace thermocouple Otherwise replace thermocouple board assembly 6 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Faulty heater Verify for blown fuses on SSR board If fuses blown replace If blow again disconnect heater ohm out across heater pins If open or shorted replace heater assembly If heaters ohm out replace SSR board Stinger temperature alarm Disconnected cable Verify cable connections If cable connections are valid swap thermcouple connector with a known good connector on the thermocouple board If error follows thermocouple replace thermocouple Otherwise replace thermocouple board assembly Faulty heater Verify for blown fuses on SSR board If fuses blown replace If blow again disconnect heater ohm out across heater pins If open or shorted replace heater assembly If heaters ohm out replace SSR board Bypass temperature alarm Disconnected cable Verify cable connections If cable connections are valid swap thermcouple connector with a known good connector on the thermocouple
192. larm min value User set alarm max value Neph Bkg G5 User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Thermo Fisher Scientific Choose Signal to Output Output Zero 0 Value Operation Instrument Controls Menu Full Scale 100 Value Flw Purge User set alarm min value User set alarm max value The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a list of the analog output signal choices Choices are grouped into three categories Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs This allows the user to select the output signal that will be assigned to each analog channel The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 3 for a list of items for each signal group choice e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Choose Signal to Output Table 3 3 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations Other Measurements Other Measurements 2 Analog Inputs None None None None PM Wet Temp Stack Pres Baro Analog Input 1 PM Dry Temp Dilutn Pres Pitot Analog Input 2 PM Factor Temp Stinger Pres Static Analog Input 3 Fwd Temp Bypass DP TEOM Analog Input 4 TEOM Conc Temp Neph Flw Nozzle Analog Input 5 Fwd Avg Temp Neph Bk Flw Noz Stk Analog Input 6 TEOM Inst Temp Neph PC Flw Dilution Analog Input 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 51 Instrument Controls Menu 3 52 Model 3880
193. lation should always be followed by instrument calibration as described in the Calibration chapter of this manual This chapter provides the following recommendations and procedures for installing the instrument e Lifting on page 2 1 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 2 e System Requirements on page 2 3 e Instrument Installation on page 2 3 e Setup Procedure on page 2 4 e Probe Monitor Preparation on page 2 5 e Probe Controller on page 2 8 e Probe Monitor on page 2 12 e System Startup on page 2 15 e Mounting the Mantle to Stack on page 2 17 When lifting the instrument use a procedure appropriate for lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person can lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A Model 3880 Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Unpacking and Inspection Unpacking and Inspection 2 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Depending on the intended use the Model 3880 is shipped complete in two containers One container includes the 3880 probe controller the other container includes the vacuum pump
194. le sensor This assembly should be received leak checked and qualified that no glue has impeded the function of the pressure sensor 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Probe Calibration gt Baro Pres gt Span Enter the reference value using the keypad and press to save Press aw twice to return to the Pres Probe Calibration menu Note If Service is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 From the Pres Probe Calibration menu choose Static Pres On the rear panel of the Probe Controller Sensors remove 1 8 inch tubing from the push to connect PTC port 6 and leave open to atmosphere From the Static Pres Cal menu choose Zero to zero the Model 3880 Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Pressure Sensors 4 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual static pressure sensor Press to calibrate the zero value offset Press W to return to the Static Pres Cal menu From the Static Pres Cal menu choose Span Set span for the Static Pres targeting 50 mmHg Refer to Figure 4 1 a Connect 1 8 inch tubing into port 6 from one side of the 1 8 inch T fitting b Zero manometer before connecting the other end of the 1 8 inch tubing from the 1 8 inch T Fitting then connect to the manometer e g DPI 705 series c Using a 10 cc Syringe draw the syringe back before connecting to the last port on the 1 8 inch T Fitting d SLOWLY push the syrin
195. le Cap from the Mantle Chassis and slowly pull the Mantle Cap with the internal assemblies straight out while guiding the cables and dump tube through the Mantle Chassis 12 At the Mantle Cap disconnect the 1 8 inch Swagelok fitting of the Stack Thermocouple Assembly and pull the thermocouple out enough to get cutters in behind the Swagelok cap and ferrules Cut the thermocouple and pull the main part of the assembly back through the Mantle Cap z Zz Iz zz z z x AA E zi SEI EE z ze zv I 9 125 THERMOCOUPLE dl Figure 7 30 Stack Thermocouple Length Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 59 Servicing System Drawings 13 Insert the new Stack Thermocouple Assembly in the Mantle Cap and install the new Swagelok cap and ferrules but do not tighten Adjust the length of the thermocouple by measuring from the end stack side of the Mantle Cap to the tip of the Stack Thermocouple The length should measure 9 inches 125 inches When the thermocouple is adjusted to the proper length tighten down the Swagelok Cap Refer to Figure 7 30 14 Reassembly the assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use Silver Goop Thread Lubricant on the Mantle Cap mounting screws when reinstalling System Refer to the following Figure 7 31 through Figure 7 37 for plumbing and Drawin gs electrical connections for the probe controller and p
196. le cable from the Thermocouple PCBA c Set the OFFSET on the calibration screen so the Temperature reading matches the Thermocouple Calibrator 100 C d Reconnect the Thermocouple cable to the Nephelometer port and verify the temperature reading 1 C Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Thermocouple Temperature Probe Calibration Select DILUTION OFFSET Dilution Thermocouple a Set the Thermocouple Calibrator to 100 C and Disconnect the Thermocouple from the extension cable labeled Dilution Connect to the Thermocouple extension cable from the Thermocouple PCBA Set the OFFSET on the calibration screen so the Temperature reading matches the Thermocouple Calibrator 100 C Reconnect the Thermocouple extension cable to the Dilution Thermocouple and verify the temperature reading 1 C Select STINGER OFFSET Stinger Thermocouple a Set the Thermocouple Calibrator to 100 C and disconnect the Thermocouple from the extension cable labeled Stinger located on the Herter Block Assembly Connect to the Thermocouple extension cable from the Thermocouple PCBA Set the OFFSET on the calibration screen so the temperature reading matches the Thermocouple Calibrator 100 C Reconnect the Thermocouple extension cable to the Stinger Thermocouple and verify the Temperature reading 1 C Select BYPASS OFFSET Dilution Thermocouple a Set the Thermoco
197. lectricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Preventive Table 5 1 provides a list of components that require periodic maintenance Maintenance Schedule Note The preventive maintenance schedule is site specific Inspect the components periodically until you can establish a schedule appropriate for your site A Table 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Schedule Component Quarterly Semi Annually Annually Fan Filter Inspect Clean X TEOM Filter Replacement X HEPA Filter Replacement X Sample Pump Rebuild Replace X Install O Ring Replacement Kit X By Pass Pump Rebuild Replace Brush Out Sample Line TEOM Transducer Service Nephelometer Service Heated Block Service X lt X x x x Clean Inspect Nozzle amp Dilution Module May vary with source concentration and frequency of reference measurement Factory Service Only 5 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning Fan Filter Inspection Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filter Figure 5 1 and Cleaning on the Probe Controller 1 Remove the fan guard from the fan by unsnapping it No t
198. ll result in a positive flow leaving the nozzle 8 With the system in Monitor mode test the flow using a reference flow meter measuring standard liters per minute 2760 mmHg 25 deg C measure the flow output of the nozzle The measured flow should equal the nozzle flow appearing negative under Diagnostics Flows within 0 2 slpm If this is out of tolerance check for leaks Refer to Leak Check on page 5 22 9 Set the system temperatures as follows Dilution 165 C wet stack 120 C dry stack Stinger 120 C Block 100 C Nephelometer 58 C TEOM air tube 62 C TEOM case 65 C 10 After system comes to temperature place system into Monitor mode and measure flow entering the nozzle The nozzle flow displayed on the Diagnostics gt Flows screen should match the flow measured by the reference flow meter within 0 2 slpm If not refer to Leak Check on page 5 22 11 The system may now be inserted into the monitoring location and secured to the flange Place system in Purge mode and set all temperatures to zero Let cool then install 2 16 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Mounting the Mantle to Stack Mounting the Depending on work area manpower and other site specific criteria you may opt to install the mantle and probe at once or the mantle first and Mantle to Stack probe Use the following procedure to mount the mantle to stack Align mantle thru
199. ll the SSR board follow previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Pitot Valve Replacement A DC Power Supply Replacement A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pitot Valve Replacement 5 Re install the measurement case assembly Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Use the following procedure to replace the Pitot valve Equipment Required Pitot valve assembly Flat blade screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the two 1 8 inch lines from the valve PTC fittings 2 Remove the power line from the valve 3 Remove the two valve mounting screws 4 Remove the valve 5 To install the Pitot Valve Assembly follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply Figure 7 9 Equipment Required DC power supply Phillips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is
200. locking nut Lift handle and Mounting Cap with the Sample Inlet will drop out Note the orientation of both the handle and the mounting cap See Figure 5 33 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 33 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check 5 34 Model 38801 Instruction Manual E Clip Locking Nut Figure 5 33 Top View of TEOM Sample Inlet e With the Mounting Cap placed on a flat surface push down on the Sample Inlet tube to gain access to the O Ring Remove old O Ring and clean the parts before reassembling Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the O Ring before installation Reassemble in the reverse order See Figure 5 34 To replace the TEOM Mounting Cap O Ring first by removing the old O Ring and replace with the new from the O Ring kit Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the O Ring before installation See Figure 5 34 To replace the TEOM Sample Port O Ring first by removing the old O Ring and replace with the new from the O Ring kit Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the O Ring before installation See Figure 5 34 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check EK REA d 9 ES E 1 O B 5 Heated Air Tube O rings ES NS PP ae PH 7 TEOM Sample Port O ring TEOM Mounting Cap O ring Figure 5 34 O Ring Locations of the TEOM Mounting Assembly Front Section of the Probe
201. lowing procedure to clean and inspect the nozzle and dilution ni Dilution Module e Cleaning Pe Required Open end wrench 1 2 inch and 9 16 inch Allen wrench 5 64 inch and 7 64 inch 5 20 Model 3880i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Nozzle and Dilution Module Cleaning Nylon cleaning brush Paper towels clean rags Acetone 2 O ring 1 2 ID x 11 16 OD 1 O ring 5 8 ID x 3 4 OD Vacuum grease Pipe cleaner small Scribe or pick Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Remove the dilution module by loosening the swagelok fitting of the PTFE line Loosen the three 5 64 inch Allen set screws at the base of the module The assembly should slide forward off the sample line 2 Clean the outside of the assemblies with a stiff bristle nylon brush and acetone Use a scribe to scrap off any thickly built up contamination 3 Remove the nozzle by loosening the 1 4 inch swagelok cap at the base of the nozzle and pull the assembly straight out of the dilution module 4 Clean the inside of the nozzle with a pipe cleaner and f
202. lt Even or Odd e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Parity Stop Bits The Stop Bits screen is used to set the number of stop bits for the serial port to 1 default or 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Stop Bits ae EH mnie a i RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt R 232 485 Selection Instrument ID Gesytec Serial Nunber 3 34 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID number The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more instruments of the same model are connected to one computer Valid instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The PM CEMS has a default instrument ID of 80 For more information about the ins
203. lug men Figure 5 30 Sample Line Connection with Capped Air Tube Blind VCO Plug 13 To isolate the TEOM Mounting Assembly Filter Assembly Mass Transducer and the Normally Close side of the TEOM Bypass Valve a Remove heated Air Tube from the TEOM Mounting Assembly b Connect the red silicone tubing to the TEOM Sample Port of the mounting assembly and draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 31 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks continue to the next step See Figure 5 31 e RN TEOM Sample Port Se EM Figure 5 31 TEOM Sample Port 14 To isolate the TEOM Mounting Assembly Filter Assembly and the Mass Transducer a 5 32 Model 388017 Instruction Manual Disconnect the Viton Tubing from the reducing T fitting and insert a 1 8 inch sealing plug into the Viton tubing Connect the red silicone tubing to sample port of the TEOM and draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If a leak persist that it is either in the TEOM Mass Transducer or the TEOM Mounting cap See Figure 5 32 Troubleshooting becomes limited
204. lushing with acetone Inspect assembly for excessive corrosion or cracks that could cause leaks 5 Remove the top cap from the dilution module by removing the three 7 64 inch Allen screws from the top of the assembly Clean the inside of the cap with pipe cleaners and acetone 6 On the main body of the dilution module you will see a white air defuser and an o ring on the cap side Remove and clean the defuser ensuring all of the small holes are clear of obstructions Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 21 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check Leak Check 5 22 Model 38801 Instruction Manual 75 10 Clean the interior of the main body of the assembly Again if they have not been replaced in six months remove the two o rings from the inside of the housing 1 2 ID x 11 16 OD You will need a scribe or pick to gently pry this from their slotted mounts Reinstall the o rings and apply a light coating of vacuum grease At this time if the o rings have not been replaced in six months replace the cap o ring 5 8 ID x 3 4 OD Reinstall the air defuser and replace the cap onto the assembly Reinstall the dilution module onto the probe monitor First push the assembly in place and then tighten the 1 4 inch swagelok connection Then tighten the three 5 64 inch set screws Reinstall the nozzle and tighten the 1 4 inch swagelok fitting Then tighten the three set screws at the base of the module by tightening each screw a quarter turn at a
205. meters Acceptable alarm limits range from O to 4 50 VDC If the neph Span Ref reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Span Ref EH DHOBM E EM a EA DE e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Span Ref gt Min or Max Neph RH The Neph RH screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from O to 50 in percent If the neph RH reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 87 Operation Alarms Menu is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph RH e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph RH gt Min or Max DH vided ML Neph Zero Drift The Neph Zero Drift screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 4 to 4 in percent If the neph zero drift reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Nephelometer gt Neph Zero Drift DH
206. n 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock DIGITAL OUTPUTS J2 gt cO OO N on A CO N Thermo Fisher Scientific Relay 1 Contact a Relay 2 Contact a Relay 3 Contact a Relay 4 Contact a Relay 5 Contact a Relay 6 Contact a Relay 7 Contact a Relay 8 Contact a Relay 9 Contact a Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 10 Relay 10 Contact a 11 NC 12 Solenoid Drive Output 1 13 Solenoid Drive Output 2 14 Solenoid Drive Output 3 15 Solenoid Drive Output 4 16 Solenoid Drive Output 5 17 Solenoid Drive Output 6 18 Solenoid Drive Output 7 19 Solenoid Drive Output 8 20 Relay 1 Contact b 21 Relay 2 Contact b 22 Relay 3 Contact b 23 Relay 4 Contact b 24 Relay 5 Contact b 25 Relay 6 Contact b 26 Relay 7 Contact b 2 Relay 8 Contact b 28 Relay 9 Contact b 29 Relay 10 Contact b 30 24V 31 24V 32 24V 33 24V 34 24V 35 24V 36 24V 37 24V 6 20 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Table 6 10 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label RS485 Reference Designator J1 CO N Pi Signal Description Ground RS485 RS485 PRESSURE J2 cO ao N Cc c A CO N NC AIN BARO AIN DPL AIN DPH AIN PS AIN
207. n A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Sample MFC Calibration RSI Teh IT Li EB Mi PUES i Er ja ier LES ees a SIE eod AP da Jo PIL PUPMPIO Set Sample MFC The Set Sample MFC calibration point screen allows the user to view and Calibration set the selected point for sample mass flow controller calibration of volume flow It also displays the standard flow computed from the specified volume flow All Sample MFC set screens function the same way e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Sample MFC Calibration gt 26 CENT TR Toe fl WS Lei Phe tLe Lb A Dilution MFC The Dilution MFC Calibration screen allows the user to calibrate the Calibration dilution mass flow controller at set SLPM points The dilution MFC calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Dilution MFC Calibration 3 100 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Dilution MFC Calibration Bypass MFC Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Set Dilution MFC calibration point screen allows the user to view and set the selected point for dilution mass flow controller calibration of volume flow It also displays the standard flow computed from the spec
208. n allows the user to view and set the selected alarm Flow parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 17 to 30 SLPM If the dilution flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu The Bypass Flow screen functions the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Dilution DH pikari MAMA e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Dilution gt Min or Max OEH CHp Fi a EA Sample Flow Sample The Sample Flow screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm Check Flow parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 1 to 4 SLPM If the sample flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu The Sample Check Flow screen functions the same way e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Sample 3 82 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flows gt Sample gt Min or Max Sample Drift The Sample Drift screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 10 to 10 in percent If the sample drift reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm
209. n the event of a power failure Thermo Fisher Scientific Commands List Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Table B 2 lists the Model 38807 C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description 1 Simulates pressing soft key 1 pushbutton 2 Simulates pressing soft key 2 pushbutton 3 Simulates pressing soft key 3 pushbutton 4 Simulates pressing soft key 4 pushbutton addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ethernet port addr ntp Reports the IP address for network time protocol server allow mode cmd Reports sets the current set allow mode command analog iout range Reports sets analog current output range per channel analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel analog vout range Reports sets analog voltage output range per channel avg time Reports sets averaging time baud Reports sets current baud rate bb period Reports sets blow back frequency clr lrecs Clears away only long records that have been saved clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved clr srecs Clears away only short records that have been saved contrast Reports sets curre
210. ndix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a list of C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Model 3880 Instruction Manual i About This Manual Safety e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet Safety Review the following information carefully before using the probe This manual provides specific information on how to operate the system however if the system is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Safety and Equipment This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety Damage Alerts hazards and risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Alert A A A j Equipment Damage Description A hazard is present that will result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard is present or an unsafe practice can result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A The hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A The hazard or unsafe practice could result in pr
211. ng see the Servicing chapter starting on page 7 1 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Theory of Operation Theory of Operation 1 2 Model 38801 Instruction Manual The Model 3880 is based on two methods of particulate mass detection These methods are light scattering and inertial weighing The continuous measurement of particulate mass is through the use of elastic light scattering In the presence of light particulate matter is known to scatter light in all directions The intensity by which light is scattered in the presence of an incident beam of light is given by T ME EM B c ita Sr ap i i Jf A F 8 ad dado where R scattered light lo incident illumination irradiance N particle number concentration Ca mass concentration f dp size distribution function A E wavelength of illuminating source r distance to detector from particle scattering light il i2 E Lonenz Mie scattering intensity functions fA source detector wavelength dependence PO angular scattering geometry of optical system While the detection of particulate with this method can offer an extensive dynamic range and rapid response the multitude of parameters listed above can significantly influence the accuracy Therefore a continuous internal mass reference is used to scale the light scattering response The primary method of mass measurement is an inertial weighing technology based on measuring the frequency of vibra
212. ng either the Diagnostics Nephelometer Menu or through the use of the CLINK neph refy to read the value After adjusting the nehp source a neph zero must be performed Auto Span To set the Auto Span Values go to Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Service gt Nephelometer Calibrations gt Auto Span Then select MAX to set the maximum value The default value is 50 mg m and the maximum value you can set is 200 mg m This max value will be approximately equal to the Span Source 4 in the Span Cal Value in the previous calibration menu After the max value is entered you can now start an auto calibration Main Menu Instrument Controls Service Nephelometer Calibrations gt Auto Span gt Start Auto Span The display will start Calibrating This calibration will take several minutes to complete The result will be displayed in the Span cal Values screen TEOM The TEOM is serviced and calibrated at the factory to determine the KO value Typically the KO is a fixed value based on the tapered element Calibration of the TEOM mass transducer must be done by a trained technician 4 8 Model 3880i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance that should be performed on the system to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly you should inspect the syst
213. ng goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Barometric e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Barometric gt Min or Max 3 78 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu EH DHOBM Static Pressure The Static Pressure screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 18 7 to 18 7 mmHg If the static pressure reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Static e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Static gt Min or Max EH DHOBM E EM PAS Pitot Pressure The Pitot Pressure screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 9 3 to 9 3 mmHg If the pitot pressure reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Pitot Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Alarms Menu CO guide ML PEA e In t
214. ngs gt Host Name Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol NTP Server screen is used to edit the IP Server address of the NTP server An NTP server may be used to periodically synchronize the instrument s real time clock with a standard More information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be found at http www ntp org e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt NTP Svr 1 0 Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH Guided ML Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings DH HOM ML r EA Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground is normally op
215. nly be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Temperature Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Temperature Calibration gt Neph Blk Offset The Temperatures Dilution Stinger Bypass Stack and MIB Offset screens function the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 95 Operation Service Menu Pressure Probe The Pressure Probe Calibration submenu allows the user to view and Calibration calibrate the barametric pressure and the vacuum pressure The pressure probe calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Pres Probe Calibration Barometer Pressure The Barometer Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the Calibration barometer pressure offset span or reset default values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Pres Probe Calibration Baro Pres 3 96 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Calibrate Barometer The Calibrate Barometer Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and Pressure Span pressure sensor calibration span point Note The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the
216. nstrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument OFF and disconnect the power cord 2 At the probe monitor replace the by pass HEPA filter jumbo located on the outside of the probe monitor connected to the by pass bulkhead fitting Remove the filter by loosening the fittings on each end When reinstalling ensure flow arrow is pointing away from the monitor which is the direction of the air flow 3 Remove the side covers of the probe monitor and locate the purge TEOM and neph HEPA filters Remove filters by loosening the connectors at the filter side if connectors are not being replaced or at the PTFE line side if connectors are being replaced 4 When reinstalling filters if there is a flow arrow indicator on the filter install filter with the flow arrow going the opposite direction of the actual flow If there is no indicator arrow install the filters so that the inlet air enters the filter on the outside surface of the filter This is so that the filtered particulate will build up on the outside surface of the filter giving a better visual indication of filter contamination 5 Replace probe monitor covers Thermo Fisher Scientific TEOM Filter Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Preventive Maintenance TEOM Filter Replacement 6 At the probe controller remove the top cover and locate the sample small
217. nt screen contrast copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad copy sp to lrec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch pad custom Reports sets defined custom range concentration data treatment Irec Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in long records Model 3880 Instruction Manual BA C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 4 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Command Description data treatment srec Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in short records date Reports sets current date default params Sets parameters to default values dhcp Reports sets state of use of DHCP diag volt ob Reports diagnostic voltage level for I O expansion board diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface board diag volt neph Reports diagnostic voltage level for dual nephelometer board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs dilution ratio Reports sets d
218. o Cal gt Restore Previous Cal E DHOBM The Clear Current Calibration screen allows the user to clear the nephelometer zero calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Nephelometer Calibration Zero Cal Values Restore Zero Cal Clear Current Cal Span Calibration Values The Span Calibration Values submenu allows the user to read the span values and set the duration of each span value e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Nephelometer Calibration Span Cal Values CO sub Piet 3 104 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Span Dilution screen allows the user to view and set the temperature P P parameter for the selected component e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Nephelometer Calibration Span Cal Values Span Duration 1 Nephelometer RH The Nephelometer RH screen allows the user to set the nephelometer RH offset e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Nephelometer Calibration Neph RH i iate Nephelometer INT The Nephelometer Int Temperature screen allows the user to set the Temperature nephelometer int offset e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Nephelometer Calibration Neph Int Temp Nephelometer Source The Nephelometer Source screen allows the user to view and set the nephelometer source Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 105 Operation Service Menu e In the Main
219. odel 3880 Instruction Manual 7 51 Servicing Dilution Supply Assembly Removal Dilution Supply Assembly Removal 7 52 Model 38801 Instruction Manual 9 Reinstall the mantle following the previous steps When reinstalling mantle ensure that the pitot lines feed through the center of the heated bench mounts The rest of the line can be tilted down to clear the heated bench for reconnection Use the following procedure to remove the dilution supply assembly Figure 7 29 Equipment Required Replacement dilution supply assembly Open end wrench 9 16 inch and 1 inch Adjustable wrench Allen wrench 5 32 inch Silver goop thread lubricant Stiff bristle nylon brush Pick or awl Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Atthe probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Atthe Probe Monitor remove the monitor from the stack by removing the stack flange bolts then gently slide the Probe Monitor out of the stack taking caution not to damage the nozzle or stack thermocouple mounted on the end of the mande Place Monitor on a flat work surface and support the Mantle as
220. ometer span reference Only active during system check No current during system check Optics becoming fouled Only active during system check Verify that instrument is doing a scheduled system check Verify cable connection on span source assembly Try re zeroing If fails send nephelometer in for servicing Verify that instrument is doing a scheduled system check No reference detector voltage during system check Verify cable connection on source reference detector assembly Neph forward gains alarm Nephelometer optics becoming fouled Table 6 6 Troubleshooting TEOM Try re zeroing If fails send nephelometer in for servicing Malfunction Possible Cause Action TEOM frequency alarm Sample filter improperly Re seat filter wiring filter tool seated replace sample filter Transducer not installed Install transducer TEOM std dev alarm Improperly installed sample Re seat or replace or replace filter Filter has accumulated too much sample sample filter Replace sample filter TEOM mass alarm Filter has accumulated too much sample Replace sample filter Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Mass not reset after new filter installed Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Reset filter for mass instrument controls Reset TEOM total mass From Main Menu gt Instrument Controls No communications with TEOM assembly Disconne
221. on Manual 3 93 Operation Service Menu Velocity Service Menu 3 94 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The Velocity screen allows the user to view and set the selected velocity alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 30 m s If the velocity reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument gt Velocity e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument gt Velocity gt Min or Max The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode When the service mode is active the service wrench icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar To put the instrument into the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Temperature The Temperature Calibration submenu allows the user to view and set Calibration other temperature calibration values The temperature calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should o
222. on menu choose TEOM DP Pres Disconnect Low and High tubes from the TEOM Mounting Assembly within the Probe Monitor and leave open to atmosphere From the TEOM DP Pres Cal menu choose Zero to zero the TEOM DP sensor Press to calibrate the zero value Press W Teo return to the TEOM DP Pres Cal menu 7 From the TEOM DP Pres Cal menu choose Span Set span for the TEOM DP Pres targeting 225 mmHg Refer to Figure 4 2 a Connect 1 8 inch tubing High from the TEOM Mounting Assembly to one side of the 1 8 inch push connect T fitting Zero manometer before connecting the other end of the 1 8 inch tubing from the 1 8 inch T Fitting then connect directly to the manometer e g DPI 705 series Using a 10 cc Syringe draw the syringe back before connecting to the last port on the 1 8 inch T Fitting SLOWLY push the syringe in to apply pressure to obtain 225 mmHg once stable Enter the manometer reading into the Set To value and using the keypad and press to save Carefully reconnect the high and low tubes to the TEOM mounting assembly 1 8 T Fitting Mano meter 10 cc Syringe Tygon tubing 2 ft 1 8 OD X 1 16 ID Tygon tubing 2 in 1 8 OD X 1 16 ID Tygon tubing 2 ft 1 8 OD X 1 16 ID Figure 4 1 Nephelometer Calibration Diagram Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Sample MFC Low 1 8 T Fitting AP Mano meter 10 cc Syringe Tygon tubing 2 ft 1 8 OD X 1
223. ools are required DO NOT remove the four mounting screws 2 Flush the filter with warm water and let dry a clean oil free air purge will help the drying process or gently blow the filter clean with compressed air 3 Re install the filter and fan guard Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Mounting Screws 4 e Do not remove Fan Guard Filter Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance HEPA Filter Replacement HEPA Filter Replacement A 5 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the HEPA filters within the Probe Monitor Equipment Required 3 Inline filters medium 1 HEPA filter jumbo 1 HEPA filter small Open end wrench 5 32 inch and 11 16 inch Adjustable wrench 1 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the i
224. op of the bottom plate 10 Tighten the four top plate screws to a maximum torque of 6 7 inch lbs Turn the fan by hand to confirm that the pump turns freely 11 Replace the compressor housing cover and gasket Install the four cover screws making sure not to over tighten Top Plate screws 4x Top Plate Flapper Valve Bottom Plate Diaphragm Cover Screws 4x Compressor Housing Cover Figure 5 11 Rebuilding the Sample Pump 5 10 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance O Ring Replacement O Ring Use the following procedure to replace the system o rings using the o ring Replacement io Equipment Required O ring replacement kit Vacuum grease Wrench 1 inch 1 1 2 inch 9 16 inch and 3 8 inch Tweezers Needle nose pliers Flat screwdriver small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small Heated Bench 1 At the probe controller turn off the instrument and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the side cover of the probe monitor to access internal components Sample Inlet O Ring Figure 5 12 Replacing the Hea
225. operty damage if the warning is ignored A Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual Alert f WARNING ii Model 3880 Instruction Manual Description Pneumatic umbilical must be supported during operations installation and removal of probe monitor A The Model 3880 is supplied with a three wire grounding cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representative If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Pneumatic umbilical must be supported during operations installation and removal of probe monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alert f CAUTION Equipment Damage About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Description A While installing dilution nozzle and Pitot option take care not to damage stack temperature sensor sticking out of the mantle cap A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A When loosening or tightening the large VCO sealing nut you must support the adjoining fittings A The bypass tee fitting must be held in place with a wrench when either loosening or tightening the large VCO fitting to ensure the by
226. output board ribbon cable from the motherboard Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Motherboard Replacement Motherboard Replacement A 7 30 Model 388017 Instruction Manual 4 Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 12 5 Pop the digital output board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 6 To install the digital output board follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 11 Equipment Required Motherboard Phillips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Ifan antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 5 Using the nut driver remove the six standoffs
227. ower In Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting PM CEMS Board Diagrams Table 6 22 Probe Temp Controller Board Fuses Designator Fl Value 1 00 Amp 125V Desciption 24V Power In Table 6 23 Probe Temp Controller Board Test Points Designator Color Desciption TP1 Red 5V TP2 Brown 3 3V TP3 Green D Gnd TP4 White A Gnd TP5 Black 15V TP6 Yellow 2 5V Ref TP7 Blue 15V Table 6 24 TEOM Head Controller Board Status LEDs Designator Color Desciption D3 Green 24V Power In D6 Green 24V for 5V PS D12 Green Detects Transducer EPROM D13 Red Fault D14 Green Detects Transducer KO In Range Table 6 25 TEOM Head Controller Board Fuses Designator Value Desciption Fi 5A 250V Power In F2 3 15A 250V Case Heater F3 3 15A 250V Air Tube Heater Table 6 26 TEOM Head Controller Board Test Points Designator TP2 TP3 Color Red Purple Desciption 5V 2 5V Ref Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 37 Troubleshooting Service Locations Designator Color Desciption TP4 Black 10V TP5 Brown 3 3V TP6 Drange 5v Ref TP7 Green A Gnd TP8 Blue 10V TP9 Grey D Gnd Service For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors Idwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support Locations P P PP and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0
228. pass tee does not spin This could cause leaks and possible damage to the bypass thermocouple A To prevent possible injury insure hands are clear of the actuators moving parts before applying the pressurized air to the actuator A All leak testing must be done with a vacuum pump Pressurizing the TEOM mass transducer can cause damage A Never pressurize the TEOM mass transducer A When loosening or tightening the large VCO Sealing Nut you must support the adjoining T fitting on the Heated Bench amp Take CAUTION not to bend the Stack Thermocouple A Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure amp When removing the top cover remove the three screws at the front of the cover before loosening or removing screws at the bulkhead A Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument Model 3880 Instruction Manual iii About This Manual WEEE Symbol iv Alert Description is unplugged the chassis is not at eart
229. ped off disconnect the TEOM air tube fitting from the outlet of the nephelometer Measure the positive flow coming from the outlet of the nephelometer which is due to the purge flow supply approximately 0 4 slpm 0 1 slpm is expected Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Nephelometer From the Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Purge Flow Enter this value using the keypad and press to save Press Cm to return to the Service menu Note If Service is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A N e p h e ometer Seethe following to calibrate the nephelometer Zero Cal Values This is achieved throught the service menu Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Zero Cal Values gt Auto Neph Zero Cal The system will automatically enter into a Purge mode followed by a Neph Zero mode Allow 15 minutes for this to be completed Span Cal Values This is for the span calibration of the nephelometer This will verify the concentration value set in Auto Span Span source 1 2 3 and 4 are determined during an auto cal and are equal to 5 10 50 and 90 of the user selected max value respectively Span duration 1 2 3 and 4 are the respective duration for the above referenced span values The span duration has a range of 90 to 240 seconds and is defalulted to use 180 seconds Neph RH The calibration of the
230. phelometer neph conc Reports concentration of the forward a and backward b of the nephelometer neph gain Reports current value of the gains for the forward a and backward b of the nephelometer neph ired Reports source current of the nephelometer neph mode Reports sets current operating mode of the nephelometer neph offsets Resets backgrounds of the zero values for the forward a and backward b of the nephelometer neph raw conc Reports current NEPH raw concentration neph refv Reports reference detector voltage of the nephelometer Model 3880 Instruction Manual BA C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Command Description neph rh Reports reference detector voltage of the nephelometer neph rh offset Reports sets offset used to calibrate the RH sensor in the nephelometer neph scatterv Nephelometer scatter voltage neph sired Reports span source current of the nephelometer neph span conc 1 neph span conc 2 Reports sets individual span source concentration 1 Reports sets individual span source concentration 2 neph span conc 3 Reports sets individual span source concentration 3 neph span conc 4 Reports sets individual span source concentration 4 neph spsrc level Reports sets level on the span source hot neph src level Reports sets level set to obtain 65 mA on the source cold neph srefv Repor
231. pper View Probe Monitor Rear Figure 2 14 Lower View of Probe Monitor Connections Rear 2 14 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation System Startup System Sta rtup Use the following procedure when starting the instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Install and Release Lever 1 Check rear compartment of the probe monitor to be sure a TEOM module has been installed and the release lever is pushed firmly to the left Figure 2 15 Figure 2 15 TEOM Mounting 2 Check condition of the sampling nozzle and dilution fittings If the system has been shipped or located to the monitoring port with the nozzle assembly removed locate the assembly slide over the 1 2 inch sample tube at the mantle inlet and secure the dilution air fittings to the available 14 inch port 3 Confirm adequate zero air and CDA are provided 4 Power the system ON 5 Place system into a Purge mode using Instrument Controls gt Functional Mode Model 3880 Instruction Manual 2 15 Installation System Startup 6 From Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flows and verify the following flow settings Both Dilution and Bypass 21 0 slpm and Sample 2 5 slpm Purge flow will have been calibrated in the factory and is approximately 0 4 slpm 7 With the system in Purge mode the dilution air will automatically increase to 3 4 slpm above the set point This wi
232. r Scientific Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Replacement Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 13 then return to the beginning of this step A Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel Pin 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 9 8 10 Ground 4 8 11 14 Use the following procedure to replace the I O expansion board Figure 7 11 Note After replacing the I O expansion board calibrate the current outputs and the analog voltage inputs See the Analog Output Calibration procedure and the Analog Input Calibration procedure in this chapter A Equipment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Replacement 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the r
233. r goop thread lubricant on the Mantle Cap mounting screws when reinstalling Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 53 Servicing Sample Line Assembly Removal Sample Line Assembly Removal A 7 54 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Dilution Module Dilution Supply Assembly Sample Supplly P Assembly Stack Thermocouple Pitot Tube Assembly Pitot Line Assembly Figure 7 29 Mantle Cap Assembly with Connections Use the following procedure to remove the sample line assembly Equipment Required Replacement sample line assembly Open end wrench 9 16 inch 7 8 inch and 1 inch Adjustable wrench Allen wrench 5 32 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 Atthe probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Atthe Probe Monitor remove the monitor from the stack by removing the stack flange bolts then gently slide the Probe Monitor out of the stack taking caution not to damage the nozzle or stack thermocouple mounted on the end of the mande Place Monitor on a flat work surface and support the Mantle assemble to prevent dam
234. r or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 3880 Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty A 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL I
235. re temp teom case Reports sets current target set to TEOM case temperature temp teom tube Reports current TEOM tube temperature time Reports sets current time 24 hour time total mass Reports current total mass reading of the TEOM transducer tz Reports sets the timezone string for the network time protocol server up Simulates pressing up pushbutton velocity Thermo Fisher Scientific Reports current velocity reading Model 3880 Instruction Manual B 7 Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other analog values or variables read the status of the digital outputs of the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters listed below For details of the Model 3880i MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2
236. re information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Purge Flow CO Calor ML The Nephelometer Calibration submenu allows the user to calibrate the nephelometer as well as perform other actions like mode selection and restore background settings to previous values The nephelometer calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Note T his adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration Zero Calibration Values The Zero Calibration Values submenu allows the user to zero the nephelometer e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Zero Cal Values E DHOBM e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Nephelometer Calibration Zero Cal Values Auto Neph Cal d riers Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 103 Operation Service Menu The Restore Previous Calibration screen allows the user to restore the nephelometer zero calibration e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration gt Zero Cal Values gt Restore Zer
237. robe monitor 7 60 Model 388017 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing System Drawings o Slab gg ij Km 0000000 gor dan NOT133L o er E q Em SH q 1 Ca e KS Nana SSV dA er EH MO SSVW a BOB e 9 IVAI eec NOTM3L 1nO Wdwys ao FL NI 314Wvs N30133 LNO SSY 4A8 Honus 331 vao
238. roubleshoot board Table 6 7 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label RS 485 Reference Designator J1 Pin Signal Description Ground RS485_P to Partisol Interface Board RS485_N to Partisol Interface Board ETHERNET 1 0 EXPANSION BOARD J2 J3 Y CO N oo A CO N mo N oon A CO N ETX1_P ETX1_N ERX1_P 24V 24V GND GND GND RS485_P RS485_N INTF 24V J4 24V GND 1 0 EXPANSION CONNECTOR Thermo Fisher Scientific J5 c1 A CO N GNDC PELT NC GND DIGITAL IN1 DIGITAL IN2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 12 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Pin Signal Description Designator 6 GND 7 DIGITAL IN5 8 DIGITAL IN7 9 DIGITAL IN8 10 DIGITAL IN9 11 GND 12 DIGITAL_IN13 13 DIGITAL_IN15 14 GND 15 ANALOG_OUT1 16 ANALOG_OUT2 17 GNDA 18 ANALOG_OUT5 19 GNDA 20 GNDA 21 PFLT_COM 22 PFLT_NO 23 GNDA 24 DIGITAL_IN3 25 DIGITAL_IN4 26 DIGITAL ING 27 GNDA 28 DIGITAL IN9 29 DIGITAL IN11 30 DIGITAL IN12 31 DIGITAL IN14 32 DIGITAL IN16 33 GNDA 34 ANALOG_OUT2 35 ANALOG_OUT4 36 GNDA 37 ANALOG_OUT6 USER RS 485 RS J6 1 1A NC 232 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator cO aoa N oon A CO N Pi gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt CO N o O1 Es 99 N Troubleshooting Connector Pin
239. s 6 25 Table 6 12 AC Distribution Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 25 Table 6 13 Probe Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 26 Table 6 14 TEOM Head Controller Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 27 Table 6 15 SSR Driver Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 28 Table 6 16 Dichot NEPH MIB Connector Pin Descriptions 6 30 Table 5 17 MIB Status EDS zo aee aree e b ditur e 6 34 Table 6 18 MIB Test Homts 6 34 Table 6 19 SSR Driver Board Status Eis 6 35 Table 6 20 SSR Board FUSeS e iuto eode t rab to br odo 6 36 Table 6 21 Probe Temp Controller Board Status EI 6 36 Table 6 22 Probe Temp Controller Board Fuses 6 37 Table 6 23 Probe Temp Controller Board Test Points 115111155551111511111 6 37 Table 6 24 TEOM Head Controller Board Status LEDS 6 37 Table 6 25 TEOM Head Controller Board Fuses sss 6 37 Table 6 26 TEOM Head Controller Board Test PointS 6 37 Table 7 1 Model 38807 Replacement Hartz 7 4 Table 7 2 Model 3080 Ca na 1 6 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components sss 1 7 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 24 Model 3880 Instruction Manual xxi Tables xxii Model 3880 Instruction Manual Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and
240. s included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 38801 Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 Model 38801 Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument as the user may program these outpu
241. same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacture
242. sample passes through the forward light scattering assembly whereby the PM factor is applied as follows to the forward light scatter signal FWD PM wer PM factor X FWD Model 3880 Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Theory of Operation SAMPLE 1 4 Model 38801 Instruction Manual The PM is simply derived from a different functional mode referenced as the Mass Mode During this period the same slip stream passes through both the light scattering assembly and the Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance TEOM for a specified duration e g 2 3 hours At the end of this Mass Mode the average FWD and TEOM are used to update the PM factor as follows TEOM PM factor SA FWDuws EPEN DILUTION BE FILTER MFC Eesen LIGHT E SAMPLE 909 SLIP SCATTERING LEE ELT NE RETURN EN bb PUMP MFC FILTER ES Ess TEOM B D LEGEND MONITOR MODE MASS MODE BYPASS C pum K sch GK FILTER MFG PUMP Figure 1 1 Model 3880 PM CEMS Flow Schematic The relationship of frequency to mass is direct as stated above The TEOM system measures frequency As the mass of this system changes so too does the frequency However no matter what the particulate mass characteristics may be i e size shape refractive index or chemical composition the accuracy of measurement remains Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications Specifications Table 1 1 lists the standard specifica
243. se eos 7 21 DC Power Supply Replacement sans a 7 21 Analog Output Testing vinil 7 22 Analog EEN 7 24 eegene 7 25 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts 7 25 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 26 I O Expansion Board Replacement tette cers 7 27 Digital Output Board Replacement ite eege 7 29 Motherboard Replaceme nto ns nie pr eode petia tp 7 30 Measurement Interface Board Replacement sssss 7 31 Front Panel Board Replacement o ote Dente ete dites 7 32 Model 3880 Instruction Manual xiii Contents xiv Chapter 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual LCD Module Replicante acted tats ties 7 33 Nephelometer Replacement icon 7 34 Heated Bench Replacement au tate e reti eed o n ett 7 36 Valve Manifold Replacement accionada ttr ta 7 38 TEOM Board Replacement sra aere iet ove E 7 39 Reator Repldce ments ne dae Gg at ebd hc 7 41 Sample Control Valve Replacement sic uec induite 7 42 DC Power Supply Monitor Replacement sss 7 44 Thermocouple Board Replacement eee 7 46 Thermocouple Temperature Probe Calibration 7 48 Mantle Removal a scontato cna hast essct egen 7 50 Dilution Supply Assembly Removal naa ec api oan 7 52 Sample Line Assembly Removal sis bec heo 7 54 Dilution Thermocouple Removal naaa dci 7 56 Stack Thermocouple Removal uos ida 7 58 System DirawIngsuiseiietei dec ida EENEG 7 60 K
244. se the Ball Valve 2 With the Probe Monitor out of the stack and the instrument power OFF this will automatically close the Actuator Valve We can begin walking through the Leak Check process 3 Using three 3 8 swagelok caps cap off the Bypass Dil 1 Dil 2 and the Purge Air using a 1 8 swagelok cap a At the rear of the Probe Monitor Assembly add the swagelok 1 4 port adapter and nut to the Sample Port See Figure 5 25 Figure 5 25 Rear View of the Probe Monitor 4 For the Back Section 5 26 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check a Connect the hand vacuum pump using the red silicone tube to the 1 4 inch port adapter set the hand pump to VACUUM b Draw 6 in Hg on the vacuum gauge CAUTION Never pressurize the TEOM mass transducer A Note Because of the Purge Air orifice on the Nephelometer you will have to wait a minute for the vacuum value to stabilize Draw the vacuum back to 6 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading A c Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 6 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks 5 Ifa leak is encountered we can further break the rear section into smaller section to isolate the leak source a First remove the connection between the Nephelometer and the Heated Block Assembly Interconnect Fitting Assembl
245. semble to prevent damage to the Monitor chassis Allow time for the mantle to cool before starting disassembly 3 Disconnect the two Monitor side covers 4 Disconnect the Dilution and Stack thermocouple connections Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Dilution Supply Assembly Removal 5 Disconnect the Dilution and Stinger heater connections 6 Disconnect the 1 4 inch Dilution 1 line at the elbow connection at the Mantle 7 Loosen the 3 4 inch Dump line at the reducer connection Do not completely remove this nut as the ferrules are PTFE and can fall off during the removal process 8 Disconnect the Stinger Tube Face Seal fitting from the Heated Bench Assembly 9 Disconnect the three Pitot lines from the Pitot Tube Manifold assembly 10 If needed use a stiff nylon brush and a pick to clean off stack residue from the Mantle Cap socket head mounting screws Using a 5 16 inch Allen wrench remove the Mantle Cap mounting screws 11 Carefully dislodge the Mantle Cap from the Mantle Chassis and slowly pull the Mantle Cap with the internal assemblies straight out while guiding the cables and dump tube through the Mantle Chassis 12 At the Mantle Cap disconnect the 1 4 inch Swagelok Dilution Supply fitting and remove the assembly Take note of the orientation of the dilution thermocouple for reinstallation of the new assembly 13 Install the new Dilution Supply Assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use silve
246. set alarm min value User set alarm max value TEOM Stdev User set alarm min value User set alarm max value TEOM KO User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph Gains User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Air Tube Pwr User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Case Pwr User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Pres Baro User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Pres Pitot User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Pres Static User set alarm min value User set alarm max value DP TEOM User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flw Nozzle User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flw Noz Stk User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flw Dilution User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flw Bypass User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flw Sample User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flw Samp Chk User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Dil Ratio User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Stk Velocity User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Fwd Z Drift User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Fwd Sp Drift User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Total Mass User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flw Samp Dft User set alarm min value User set alarm max value TEOM Cycles User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Ref Clocks User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph Bkg G4 User set a
247. sis is not at ground earth A 1 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the top cover of the probe monitor to access internal components CAUTION When removing the top cover remove the three screws at the front of the cover before loosening or removing screws at the bulkhead A 3 Remove the plumbing line from the actuator 4 Remove the four 3 8 inch nuts from the mounting bracket Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 41 Servicing Sample Control Valve Replacement Sample Control Valve Replacement A 7 42 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Plumbing Line Actuator Nuts 4 Soc Cap Screws 2 Figure 7 20 Removing the Actuator Assembly 5 Lift the actuator assembly straight up to clear the mounting studs and the ball valve shaft coupling 6 Install the new actuator assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Ensure that the heated block ball valve is in the closed position before reinstalling the actuator assembly Use the following procedure to replace the sample control valve Equipment Required Sample control valve assembly Wrench 9 16 inch Phillips screwdriver 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument c
248. sks are organized into four areas e Instument Control e Monitoring Signals e Measurement Calculations e Output Communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O and heater control These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run common firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Model 3880 Instruction Manual 8 5 System Description Firmware Monitoring Signals Measurement Calculations Output Communication 8 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for the communications between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processor The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final measur
249. ss heaters to 0 C Let instrument cool before turning off then verify cable connections Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Defective transformer Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Place instrument in Purge mode set stinger dilution and pypass heaters to 0 C Let instrument cool before turning off then verify cable connections Low nozzle flow System leak Clogging nozzle Refer to system leak procedure Refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter No temperature readings on controller Disconnected electrical umbilical Disconnected AC input to the power thermocouple assembly Disconnected RS 485 connection on the power thermocouple assembly Malfunctioning thermocouple PCBA Malfunctioning 24 VDC power supply Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Probe Controller Malfunction Does not start no light on display Possible Cause No power or wrong power configuration Main fuse blown or missing Bad power switch or wiring connection Turn instrument off and verify umbilical connection Turn instrument off and verify AC connection to 24 VDC power supply Turn instrument off and verify RS 485 connection to RS 485 is on the power thermocouple assembly Replace thermocouple PCBA Replace 24 VDC power supply Action Check the line to confirm that power is supplied and is the right voltage and frequency
250. ssembly A Use the following procedure to remove the mantle assembly Equipment Required Wrench 9 16 inch 15 16 inch 1 inch 1 1 16 inch and 1 1 8 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Mantle Removal 1 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the side covers of the probe monitor to access internal components 3 Remove the stinger dilution and stack thermocouple connections 4 Remove the dilution and stinger heater connections 5 Remove the 1 4 inch dilution line at the elbow connection 6 Loosen the 3 4 inch dump line at the reducer connection Do not completely remove this nut as the ferrules are PTFE and can fall off during the removal process 7 Support the mantle assembly and remove the four 15 16 inch mounting bolts 15 16 Mounting Bolts 4 Figure 7 28 Removing the Mantle Assembly 8 Slowly slide the mantle forward taking care not to damage the electrical or air lines Thermo Fisher Scientific M
251. t place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following the previous steps in reverse Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another After replacing the LCD screen the contrast may need to be reset If the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command A Use the following procedure to replace the nephelometer assembly Figure 7 14 Equipment Required Nephelometer Wrench 11 16 inch Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Outlet Connection Servicing Nephelometer Replacement Phillips screwdriver 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not av
252. t serves as central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage inputs and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of OV to10VDC Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A Model 3880 Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Outputs Analog Current Outputs Analog Voltage Inputs 8 10 Model 3880 Instruction Manual The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be firmware configured for any one of the following ranges
253. t the thermocouple into the fitting until it bottoms out on the ID of the Dilution tube Mark the thermocouple at the Swagelok cap and then move the thermocouple out 1 8 inch from the mark and tighten down the Swagelok cap Using the old thermocouple as a template bend the new thermocouple lead to a 90 degree angle to properly fit within the Mantle Housing Mount the Dilution assembly back into the Mantle Cap with the Dilution Thermocouple connection pointing in towards the center on the Mantle Cap Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 57 Servicing Stack Thermocouple Removal Stack Thermocouple Removal 7 58 Model 388017 Instruction Manual 16 Reinstall the Dilution Supply Assembly by following the previous steps 1 through 11 in reverse Use silver goop thread lubricant on the Mantle Cap mounting screws when reinstalling Use the following procedure to remove the stack thermocouple assembly Figure 7 29 Equipment Required Replacement stack thermocouple assembly Open end wrench 9 16 inch 7 16 inch and 1 inch Adjustable wrench Allen wrench 5 32 inch Large wire cutters Silver goop thread lubricant Stiff bristle nylon brush Pick or awl Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any
254. ta field A value of OxFF00 requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Note This function will not work if the instrument is in service mode A Request Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception code 1 Byte 01 Illegal Function 02 llegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 38801 Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Response Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS addresses supported for the Model 38801 IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MO
255. talogging gt Flag Status Data du KR Communication The Communication Settings menu is used for communications control Settings and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Instrument Controls Menu FEET TEST rT Laf miie i Liini i4 D Pas EEE si Serial Settings The Serial Setting submenu is used for serial communications control and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings Ene Tes mT CH os Vert be i4 e i Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available The analyzer s default baud rate is set to 9600 to provide backwards compatibility with the older C series analyzers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Baud Rate Data Bits The Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits to either 7 or 8 default 3 32 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Data Bits Parity The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port to None defau
256. ted Bench External O Rings Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 11 Preventive Maintenance O Ring Replacement Nephelometer 3 Loosen the inlet and outlet connections Loosen and remove the stinger from the sample inlet remove o ring replace with new o ring Loosen and remove the neph sample adapter to gain access to both the o rings of the inlet to the nephelometer and the outlet of the heated bench assembly Figure 5 13 must support the adjoining fittings A T CAUTION When loosening or tightening the large VCO sealing nut you Figure 5 13 VCO Sealing Nut and T Fitting 4 Using the small flat head screwdriver gently pry out the inlet assembly Inspect assembly and replace the two o rings Add a light coating of vacuum grease to o rings before re installing Figure 5 14 ID D Figure 5 14 Nephelometer Sample Adapter 5 Replace both o rings one to the inlet of the nephelometer and the outlet of the heated bench assembly When completed re install the nephelometer sample adapter follow the tightening specification for VCO seals 5 12 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance O Ring Replacement 6 Loosen and remove the heated air tube assembly from the outlet o
257. the mini stinger is removed inspect and clean with acetone as needed Also inspect the o ring and replace if needed 8 At the heated bench remove and inspect the bypass and dilution thermocouples 5 18 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Sample Line Brush Down Thermocouples Figure 5 19 Thermocouple Side View Note The thermocouples must remain removed from the Heated Bench during the brush down to prevent damage the assemblies A The ball valve inside the Heated Bench is normally closed when the system is powered down therefore clean dry pressurized air must be applied to the Actuator to open the ball valve to perform the brush down This can be accomplished by removing the umbilical CDA line from the Probe Monitor bulkhead fitting and attaching it directly to the input air line connection of the Actuator CAUTION To prevent possible injury insure hands are clear of the actuators moving parts before applying the pressurized air to the actuator A 10 At the Probe Mantle remove the PTFE mantle shroud Remove the 11 Dilution Module with the Nozzle for inspection and cleaning following the procedure listed in the Section Place a clean rag at the outlet side of the sample line to catch any debris being pushed out during the brush down procedure Starting from the inlet side run the cleaning brush through
258. the sample line until it comes out the outlet side Run the brush back through the sample line from back to front and clean off the brush Repeat as needed until there is little to no contamination on the brush after the last pass When completed you can shine a light into the outlet side of Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 19 Preventive Maintenance TEOM Transducer Service the sample line and look into the inlet to see if there is any residue left in the line Sample Line PTFE Mantle Shroud A lt 8 O Q NY Figure 5 20 Brush Down Sample Line 12 When you are satisfied that the line is clear follow the preceding steps in reverse to reassemble the system TEOM Transducer This service is recommended annually or as needed This is a factory service Service that can only be performed at the Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Depot See the Service Locations section of this chapter for contact information Nephelometer This service is recommended annually or as needed This can only be Servi ce performed at the Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Depot See the Service Locations section of this chapter for contact information Heated Block This service is recommended annually or as needed This is a factory service Service that can only be performed by a trained technician See the Service Locations section of this chapter for contact information if needed or for proper training Nozzle and Use the fol
259. tific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Period The Period screen allows the user to set hour and minute for the selected mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Sys Check Schedule gt Period Co pH mai A EA E Reset TEOM Total The Reset TEOM Total Mass screen allows the user to reset the Mass accumulated mass to zero e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Reset TEOM Total Mass DEBDDT TRT iri Lim ES PRET IPTOmC DH Ota Nozzle Select The Nozzle Select screen allows the user to select which nozzle is used Nozzle 0 is the default nozzle size and will only operate the system with a fixed dilution ratio If Nozzle 1 5 is selected the dilution air will vary to maintain an isokinetic sample extraction The proper stack gas velocity profile will be needed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Nozzle Select Sample STP The Sample STP screen allows the user to correct the measured Datalogging Settings 3 22 Model 3880 Instruction Manual concentration to a standard pressure and temperature e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Sample STP The PM CEMS includes a built in datalogging capability as a standard feature The operator is allowed to create two different types of records which for historical reasons are named lrecs and srecs Each record
260. time until the unit is properly secured Use the following procedure to perform a leak check Equipment Required Leack check kit Open end wrench 1 2 inch 7 16 inch 9 16 inch and 11 16 inch 2 Large adjustable wrenches 1 inch to 2 inch adjusting range Allen head wrench 5 32 inch and 5 64 inch Stiff nylon brush Pick or awl Phillips screwdriver 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Leak Check Probe Controller 1 Turn off instrument and disconnect the power 2 All leak testing is done under vacuum When using the supplied hand vacuum pump set the lever to VACUUM See Figure 5 21 Figure 5 21 Hand Vacuum Pump 3 Sample Line Air a At the rear of the PROBE CONTROLER remove the PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE assembly from the bulkhead of SAMPLE IN b Connect a 1 4 inch port adapter and nut onto the bulkhead c Cap the SAMPLE OUT connection on the controller with a J inch Swagelok cap on the outlet side d Connect the red silicone tubing to port adapter and draw the vacuum back to 25 inHg and wait for t
261. tion of a tapered element oscillating microbalance TEOM The tapered element is a hollow tube clamped at one end and free to vibrate at the other An exchangeable filter accumulates the particulate mass that is drawn as a collected sample During sample collection this tapered element vibrates precisely at its natural resonant frequency through the assistance of electronic controls A precise electronic counter measures the frequency which has a direct relationship with mass Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Theory of Operation Specifically 2 K Pus where f frequency of oscillation Ko calibration constant m mass By arranging the above relationship into discrete time the change in mass Am can be measured between two separate frequencies f1 f2 by the f ollo W ir 1g f fe By measuring the change in sample volume passing through the TEOM and the mass as shown above the mass concentration can be calculated as follows Am PM AV where Cm particulate matter concentration Am change in particulate mass AV change in air volume It is the periodic use of the TEOM as an internal particulate mass reference that applies a correction factor PM factor to the light scattering response to calculate a final concentration Det The Model 38807 PM CEMS predominately operates in a functional mode called Monitor mode Figure 1 1 During this period a slip stream of the diluted
262. tions for the Model 3880 PM CEMS Table 1 1 Model 3880 PM CEMS Specifications Thermo Fisher Scientific Item Power requirements Description 200 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 30 amp service Clean dry air 80 slpm 75 100 psi Flange adapter 4 Universal mounting flange IP rating IP6 on probe enclosure stack Probe monitor dimensions 44 01 W x 18 69 H x 12 09 D 111 8cm W x 47 47cm H x 30 71cm D Probe monitor weight Probe controller dimensions 130 Ibs 58 97 kg 19 0 W x 8 62 H x 25 8 D 48 26cm W x 21 89cm H x 65 53cm D Probe controller weight 55 Ibs 24 95 kg Probe lengths 36 L 91 44cm L 60 L 152 4cm L Probe material 316 SS coating available upon request Mantle material Hastelloy Stainless or PFA coated Enclosure options Standard 19 in rack custom umbilical required Weather enclosure at flange available upon request Umbilical options Cold pneumatics with freeze protect flying leads 25 ft standard length with weather enclosure Custom length available upon request with 19 in rack Range 0 250 mg m Accuracy 20 without source correlation 10 with source correlation Detection limit Response time 0 25 mg m 15 minute integration time 15 minutes to 9096 of value Maximum stack temperature 200 C higher available upon request Hue gas lt 20 moisture higher available upon request
263. to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2xN N N or N 1 Function code 0x80 01 Illegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register value Hi 10 Register value Lo 10 Register value Hi 11 Register value Lo 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register value Hi 12 0x00 Register value Lo 12 0x64 Register value Hi 13 0x00 Register value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The force write single coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested ON OFE state is specified by a constant in the request da
264. trols Menu EH iai Non Alarm The Non Alarm screen allows the user to select a non alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm EH DHOB Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note T he digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed CO priori MAPA Instrument Action The Instrument Action submenu allows the user to choose the instrument action that is assigned to the selected digital input e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Confi
265. trument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Instrument ID sy Bn MEE mE Fi DH Guided Ref Fiat LPLI L PME da EE Cd The Gesytec Serial Number screen is used to set the serial number for the Gesytec protocol The Gesytec serial number defaults to zero For more information about the serial number see Appendix D Gesytec BH Protocol Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Gesytec Serial No EH mia Communication Protocol The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the protocol for serial communications Possible choices include C Link MODBUS Gesytec and Streaming Data e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Communication Protocol Streaming Data Configuration The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration of the 8 streaming data output items streaming interval current data format and current timestamp setting The Choose Stream Data submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements Other Measurements 2 and Analog Inputs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Str
266. ts for either active closed or open A Request Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Response Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte count 1 Byte N Output Status n Byte N N or N 1 N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception code 1 Byte 01 Illegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value OxCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is sho
267. ts span reference detector voltage of the nephelometer neph temp Reports PCB temperature of the nephelometer neph temp rh offset Reports sets offset used to calibrate the temp sensor in the nephelometer optics chamber no of Irec Reports sets number of long records stored in memory no of srec Reports sets number of short records stored in memory pm factor Reports current pm factor pm hist Reports sets current pm factor history pm threshold Reports current pm threshold power up mode Reports sets the power up mode as local or remote program no Reports analyzer program number push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel relay stat Reports sets relay logic status to for the designated relay s ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton save Stores parameters in FLASH sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response Use iscreen instead sp field Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list span duration Reports sets span duration times during system check span src Reports level on the span source hot span src 1 Reports sets individual span source level on span source 1 span src 2 Reports sets individual span source level on span source 2 span src 3 Reports sets individual span source level on span source 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Command C Link Protocol Commands Commands Descr
268. tube option for stack velocity Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Instrument Controls Menu measurement It also permits the user to select the method of stack velocity measurement e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Velocity Settings EBLE MEE DH pikari Ref Fiat Ai PME das EE Set Das The Set Gas screen allows the user to establish the average stack gas concentration The example below shows the Set CO screen The CO O Nz and HO screens function the same way e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Velocity Settings gt Gas External Velocity The External Velocity screen allows the user to view and set external velocity to Measured Analog or CLink This is necessary for isokinetic extraction e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Velocity Settings gt External Velocity 3 16 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Blow Back The Blow Back Schedule menu allows the user to view the next scheduled Schedule time for a probe blow back as well as the period at which it occurs It also allows schedule and period to be selected to bring you to the next screen to modify these values e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Blow Back Schedule DH Dt Next Time The Next Time screen allows the user to view and set the date hour and minut
269. two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Table Points Mettet Table Points The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Point 1 10 3 54 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EP DHOBM iL a EA DE Volts The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt Volts User Value The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure
270. uality Instruments Online Library allows our customers access to product documents and information on a constant basis Available 24 hours a day and seven days a week the online library provides quick access to information regardless of time zone or office hours To register for an account or log in please visit www thermoscientific com aqilibrary Model 3880 Instruction Manual v About This Manual Where to Get Help vi Model 38801 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Chapter 1 Introduction id 1 1 Theon CUOI ados ea tace rose cea em le 1 2 A cito adest Dada 1 5 Chapter 2 rrIEDDI mee inine aeni 2 1 TUBE cioe scat i can E Ra usos 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection i 2 2 Sy She MIRCHI te IBS euet eon tec Todes e Pe ou ete eue a Sd aca 2 3 l stramentnstallatio boats ta vec o i ADD ru HEX dior e 2 3 Set p ro A acu cS ca RR et acer da 2 4 Probe Monitor Preparation ueniet ne de ebtecctn uel 2 5 Prob Controller scant ion a 2 8 Probe Montoto ad 2 12 System A AAA a 2 15 Mounting the Mantle to taggen praise o iia 2 17 Chapter 3 MITTIT 3 1 pir RS 3 1 E EE 3 2 KEE 3 3 Alphanumeric Entry Screens arena na qa aaa A 3 4 Firmware Overview rfo eee ses rte ice eeu lever e Lev eU y Eee ena le 3 4 Power Up Serenat iake NPR aladas 3 6 EECH 3 6 Concentration CERS ENNEN land 3 7 Temperatures Scitec iude diee foo eerie n edite sc ene 3 8 Press res Screen ice eter t eee one ees
271. uipment damage The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendixes to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of the product describes the theory of operations and product specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to install and start up the system Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven software Each menu and submenu is explained Chapter 4 Calibration provides an overview on the equipment needed for calibration and a description on how to calibrate the system Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting provides guidelines for diagnosing analyzer problems isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Appe
272. ump Rebuild Bypass Pump Rebuild 5 14 Model 38801 Instruction Manual E Clip Locking Nut Figure 5 16 TEOM Mounting Lever and Cap Top View 11 12 13 With the Mounting Cap placed on a flat surface push down on the Sample Inlet tube to gain access to the o ring Remove old o ring and clean the parts before reassembling Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the o ring before installation Reassemble in the reverse order Figure 5 15 To replace the TEOM Mounting Cap o ring first by removing the old o ring and replace with the new from the o ring kit Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the o ring before installation Figure 5 15 To replace the TEOM Sample Port o ring first by removing the old o ring and replace with the new from the o ring kit Apply a very light coating of Vacuum Grease to the o ring before installation Figure 5 15 Use the following procedure to rebuild the bypass pump Figure 5 17 To replace the pump see External Pump Replacement in the Servicing chapter Equipment Required Pump rebuild kit Open end wrench 11 16 inch T 25 Torx driver Clean rags paper towels Nylon cleaning brush Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Bypass Pump Rebuild Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while
273. uple Calibrator to 100 C and Disconnect the Thermocouple from the extension cable labeled Bypass Connect to the Thermocouple extension cable from the Thermocouple PCBA Set the OFFSET on the calibration screen so the Temperature reading matches the Thermocouple Calibrator 100 C Reconnect the Thermocouple extension cable to the Bypass Thermocouple and verify the Temperature reading 1 C Select STACK OFFSET Dilution Thermocouple a Set the Thermocouple Calibrator to 100 C and disconnect the Thermocouple from the extension cable labeled Stack Connect to the Thermocouple extension cable from the Thermocouple PCBA Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 49 Servicing Mantle Removal c Set the OFFSET on the calibration screen so the Temperature reading matches the Thermocouple Calibrator 100 C d Reconnect the Thermocouple extension cable to the Stack Thermocouple and verify the Temperature reading 1 C Stinger Thermcouple Connection p e SS 1 LAIA o mee q el SS arm Lr Bypass Thermocouple 2 3 AN N D Connection Mantle Removal A 7 50 Model 38801 Instruction Manual Nephelometer Thermocouple Connection Figure 7 27 Thermocouple Placement Note Both the stack and dilution thermocouple connections are on the floor of the probe monitor They are from the mantle a
274. ure 5 9 Back of Filter Exchange Tool 5 8 Figure 5 10 Setting the FIIteE usc ettet tee See 5 8 Figure 5 11 Rebuilding the Sample Bump 5 10 Figure 5 12 Replacing the Heated Bench External O Rings 5 11 Model 3880 Instruction Manual xvii Figures xviii Model 3880 Instruction Manual Figure 5 13 VCO Sealing Nut and T mg 5 12 Figure 5 14 Nephelometer Sample Adapter ooooocicooicincincnnininnininninnoso 5 12 Figure 5 15 TEOM Mounting Assembly Cutaway 5 13 Figure 5 16 TEOM Mounting Lever and Cap Top View 5 14 Figure 5 17 Rebuilding the Bypass Bump 5 16 Figure 5 18 Sample Line Brush Down 5 18 Figure 5 19 Thermocouple Side View 5 19 Figure 5 20 Brush Down Sample Une 5 20 Figure 5 21 Hand Vacuum Bump 5 23 Figure 5 22 Sample la maca etu t oe noe gua acl 5 24 Figure 5 23 Dilution EE 5 25 Figure 5 24 E 5 25 Figure 5 25 Rear View of the Probe Monitor 5 26 Figure 5 26 Bypass T Fitting Large VCO Cap 5 27 Figure 5 27 Nephelometer Inlet and Neph Sample Adapter VCO Caps 5 28 Figure 5 28 Nephelometer Outlet with Adapter Fitting 5 29 Figure 5 29 Sample Line Connection to Heated Air Tube 5 30 Figure 5 30 Sample Line Connection with Capped Air Tube Blind VCO A 5 31 Figure 5 31 TEOM Sample Poltica o deem e pe t tetas 5 32 Figure 5 32 TEOM Sample Port Isolated from Sample Valve and Filter
275. ures screen allows the user to view and set temperature parameter for the selected component The example below shows the Dilution Temp screen The stinger bypass neph block TEOM air tube TEOM case and failsafe screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Temperatures gt temperature Set Flows The Set Flows menu allows the user to view and set user desired flow values 3 14 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flows EH mia E EM aa EA DE Set Flows The Set Flows screen allows the user to view and set flow parameter for the selected component The example below shows the Dilution Flow screen The bypass and sample flow screens function the same way e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flows gt flow EH iai Set Failsafes The Set Failsafes screen allows the user to toggle the system failsafes ON or OFF With the failsafe on the system will go to Purge mode if either the relative humidity is greater than 90 or if the stinger or bypass temperatures fall below the set failsafe temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flows gt Set Failsafes EH DHOBM E EM a EA DE Velocity Settings The Velocity Settings menu allows the user to enter the diluent stack gas concentrations when using the pitot
276. ve the three screws at the front of the cover before loosening or removing screws at the bulkhead A 3 Remove connection to the accumulator Remove the three 3 8 inch pneumatic lines Unplug power connections to the three valves Remove the four mounting nuts on the under side of the assembly and remove the valve manifold Install the new valve manifold assembly by following the previous steps in reverse 1 8 Pneumatic Lines Figure 7 18 Replacing the Valve Manifold TEOM Board Use the following procedure to replace the TEOM assembly Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Equipment Required TEOM board Wrench 11 16 inch Phillips screwdriver 2 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing TEOM Board Replacement amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A l Cover Screws 6 Board Screws 4 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord Remove the side doors of the probe monitor to access internal components Disconnect the two 1 8 pneumatic lines The DP high line is connected to the base of the TEOM tube an
277. wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks First cap off the 1 4 elbow this feeds the dilution air to the mantle with a 1 4 swagelok cap to isolate just the dilution tube internal to the mantle assembly Repeat test if leak persist then it is inside the mantle or the elbow You can remove the elbow and then using a 1 4 swagelok plug this isolates just the internal Dilution Assembly If leak persist Refer to step 7 below to remove the internal Dilution Assembly from the Mantle ga DE XII TE mm 7 Ee Dilution Air Supply d Tube Figure 5 36 Isolated Dilution Assembly of the Mantle 5 To isolate the Stinger Sample Assembly from the Mantle a With the dilution module removed and the Stinger attached to the Heated Bench Assembly and have verified that the front half of the Heated Bench does not leak Connect the red tubing to the 1 2 inch sample tube on the mantle cap and draw the vacuum back to 25 in Hg and wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading Reading should be within in 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 37 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check Figure 5 37 Isolated Stinger Sample Assembly of the Mantle minutes If vacuum reading drops troubleshoot for leaks See
278. ward Neph Fwd The Neph Fwd screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm Inst Neph Forward Avg parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 1 to 400 If the reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu The Neph Fwd Inst and Neph Fwd Avg screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations gt Neph Fwd BEE Teh PT LS i DH gu tb sd hi Ted Pe PULQPUPMPO e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations gt Neph Fwd gt Min or Max REE MEE DH iate Ref Fiat LPEI O PILRQOPUPMPO TEOM TEOM Inst TEOM The TEOM screen allows the user to view and set the selected alarm Avg Cs Conc parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 1 to 200 mg m If the 3 70 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu The TEOM Inst TEOM Avg and Cs Conc screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations gt TEOM e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentrations gt TEOM gt Min or Max Temperatures The Temperatures submenu allows the user to view and set the selected termperature alarm parameters e Int
279. while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs The I O Expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 0 20 mA e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND Eight analog voltage inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices The user may assign a label unit and a conversion table 2 to 10 points Each point in the conversion table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V an
280. wn as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read holding input registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 38801 Instruction Manual CH MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Request Function code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function code Byte count Register value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function code Exception code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000
281. xt A 3 From the umbilical side labeled to probe monitor connect the 3 8 inch tubing labeled CDA to the upper rear panel of the probe monitor 2 12 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Probe Monitor 4 Connect the 1 4 inch umbilical tubing labeled SAMPLE to the upper rear panel of the probe monitor 5 Connect the three 1 8 inch umbilical tubes labeled Pd Ps and Pi to the upper rear panel of the probe monitor 6 Connect the 3 8 inch umbilical tube labeled BYPASS to the large HEPA filter provided and connect the other end of the HEPA to the lower rear panel labeled BYPASS of the probe monitor 7 Connect the 3 8 inch umbilical tube labeled RETURN to the lower rear panel of the probe monitor 8 Connect the 3 8 inch umbilical tube labeled DIL1 to the lower rear panel of the probe monitor 9 Connect the 3 8 inch umbilical tube labeled DIL2 to the lower rear panel of the probe monitor 10 Connect the 1 8 inch umbilical tube labeled PURGE to the lower rear panel of the probe monitor 11 Connect the keyed electrical umbilical to the upper rear panel of the probe monitor labeled RS485 HEAT and connect the grounding strap to the rear panel ground lug 12 Connect the keyed electrical umbilical to the upper rear panel of the probe monitor labeled VALVES POWER Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 2 13 Installation Probe Monitor Figure 2 13 U
282. y CAUTION When loosening or tightening the large VCO Sealing Nut you must support the adjoining T fitting on the Heated Bench Figure 5 26 A Support T Fitting While Loosening or Tightening VCO Seals No Figure 5 26 Bypass T Fitting Large VCO Cap Note Tightening specification for VCO seals Tighten all Swagelok VCO fittings to finger tight then an additional 45 tighter per Swagelok Model 3880 Instruction Manual 5 27 Preventive Maintenance Leak Check 6 Place the small VCO cap onto the Nephelometer Inlet and the Large VCO cap onto the Neph Sample Adapter on the Heated Bench Assembly This now isolates the rear of the Heated Bench Assembly See Figure 5 27 Small VCO Cap Large VCO Cap 2m Figure 5 27 Nephelometer Inlet and Neph Sample Adapter VCO Caps a Remove the 3 8 sealing cap from the Bypass on the rear of the Probe Monitor Assembly and connect the 3 8 Tube Adapter and nut to the Bulkhead b Connect the hand vacuum pump using the red silicone tube set the hand pump to VACUUM and draw 25 in Hg on the vacuum gauge Wait for the reading to stabilize and record reading c Reading should be within 2 of initial vacuum reading e g 25 in Hg 0 5 in Hg over 5 minutes If NO leak is found continue 7 To isolate the Nephelometer Assembly a Remove the Heated Air Tube Assembly from the Outlet of the Nephelometer b Attach the Fitting adapter Nut and Push
283. y following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply assembly Equipment Required Thermocouple board assembly Phillips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ground earth A 1 At the probe controller turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the top cover of the probe monitor to access internal components Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Thermocouple Board Replacement front of the cover before loosening or removing screws at the bulkhead A f CAUTION When removing the top cover remove the three screws at the 3 Remove the RS485 and power connections on the top of the assembly 4 Remove the cover of the assembly Cover Screws 4 Figure 7 25 Removing the Thermocouple Board Cover 5 Remove the thermocouple connections 6 Remove the four standoffs on the corners of the assembly Board Standoffs 4 Thermocouple Board Assembly Figure 7 26 Thermocouple Board Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 7 47 Servicing Thermocouple Temperature Probe Calibration 7 48
284. y the current Voltages voltage readings e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Voltages Thermocouple Board EN DHOBM E EM a i Temperatures The Temperatures screen read only displays the current relative humidity and temperature readings The board temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the measurement interface board Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 3880 Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Diagnostics Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Temperatures Pressures The Pressures screen read only displays the current pressure readings The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressures Flows The Flows screen read only displays the current flow readings The flow is measured by mass flow controllers e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Flows 3 62 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Velocity The Velocity screen read only displays the current stack velocity e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Velocity EH iai Nephelometer The Nephelometer screen read only displays the nephelometer parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Nephelometer STII EH Otxta PU PFih2ribbd TEOM Parameters The TEOM Parameters screen read only displays the current CRn reading e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics TEOM Paramet
285. y when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults GC oi motel CO DHOBMI PLI i PME Ba dd Restore Factory The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and Defaults configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults 3 110 Model 3880 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Password Menu The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface but they can still be changed via remote operation When the front panel is locked the user can still navigate the menu and view data instrument parameters and settings but nothing can be changed The password lock icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the password lock is active The items visible under the Password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Set Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock the front panel an

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

02 仕様書  Autocat 2 Wave et Fiber Optix  paul pouvreau  ITA - SIC Divisione Elettronica  Samsung 3D Blu-ray Player  OPERATING AND INSTALLATION MANUAL  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file